JP2021053285A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing mixture of a screw member into a putout part.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a first guidance passage formation part 202 for forming a guidance passage for guiding game balls of a ball tank formation part 201 to a putout device 200; and cover parts (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover one portion of an upper surface of the first guidance passage formation part 202. Predetermined limitation parts (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and a recessed part 336) for restricting falling of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 falling onto the cover part onto the first guidance passage formation part 202 are provided in the cover part. Plural specific limitation parts (for example, hole parts 271A to 271H) for restricting movement of screw members falling on the first guidance passage formation part 202 to the putout device 200 are provided in the first guidance passage formation part 202.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing a game.

In a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, a storage unit capable of storing game media supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out the game medium, and a payout unit. Some have a guide passage forming portion for forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and these storage portions and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by a screw member. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-96050

In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame, the screw member attached to the inside of the game island, and the like are removed to form the storage portion and the guide passage. If it falls into the section, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium, and the game medium cannot be paid out normally, the payout device will break down, or the screw member will be the player together with the game medium. There was a problem that it was sometimes paid out.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a screw member from being mixed in a payout portion.

The game machine of means 1
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
A storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P) and a storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201)
A payout unit (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out game media, and
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion. And the second guide passage forming part 204),
A cover portion (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion.
With
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated hole 316A) for limiting the falling of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion to the guide passage forming portion on the cover portion. ~ 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
The guide passage forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guidance passage forming portion to the payout portion (FIG. 11). , Fig. 12 and Fig. 27),
The predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) is provided so as to be able to drop from the cover portion without retaining the game medium that has fallen on the cover portion. ,
further,
Sound output means capable of outputting the production sound (for example, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the voice data ROM 079SG133, and the amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13).
A display means capable of displaying a production video (for example, an image display device 5) and
An effect executing means (for example, a reach effect) capable of displaying a character's effect moving image on the display means and outputting an effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the character's effect moving image (for example, reach effect). CPU120 for production control) and
With
The effect executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving speed at which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40). As shown in -19 to 40-25, during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the moving image of each reach effect becomes the progress speed V2. The part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40-). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 40-25, the speakers 8L and 8R during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively. The part where BGM, production sound, etc. are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion. Further, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined limiting portion and the state in which the screw member can always stay can be maintained, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. can do. In addition, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed related to the production sound corresponding to the predetermined production does not change between the first period and the second period. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent giving a feeling of strangeness.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 2. Conventionally, in a game machine, a battle effect and a timer effect can be executed at the same time as a reach effect as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-99801, and the battle effect is reproduced during the battle effect. In some cases, slow motion effects that slow down the speed can be further executed. However, in such a game machine, if the playback speed of the battle effect is slowed down as a slow motion effect, the progress speed of the timer effect is also slowed down, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. There is a problem, and in view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine that can prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

The game machine of means 2
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
Sound output means capable of outputting the production sound (for example, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the voice data ROM 079SG133, and the amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13).
A display means capable of displaying a production video (for example, an image display device 5) and
An effect executing means (for example, a reach effect) capable of displaying a character's effect moving image on the display means and outputting an effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the character's effect moving image (for example, reach effect). CPU120 for production control) and
With
The effect executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving speed at which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40). As shown in -19 to 40-25, during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the moving image of each reach effect becomes the progress speed V2. The part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40-). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 40-25, the speakers 8L and 8R during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively. The part where BGM, production sound, etc. are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the production sound corresponding to the predetermined production does not change between the first period and the second period. , It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a left side view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a top view which shows the frame for the game machine to which the game board is attached. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the game board was removed from the game machine frame. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the frame for a game machine. It is an enlarged rear view which shows the upper part of the back surface of the frame for a game machine. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10A, FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 10A, and FIG. 10C is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 10A. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is an EE sectional view of (A), and (C) is an FF sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing a second cover body, (B) is a GG cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an HF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing a third cover body, (B) is an I-I cross-sectional view of (A), (C) is a JJ cross-sectional view of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. FIG. 5 (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stop member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stop member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view which shows. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame on which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK cross section of (A), and (C) is an LL cross section of (B). It is a perspective view which shows the state which the periphery of the ball tank part on the back surface of a game frame is seen from diagonally behind. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage forming part on the back surface of a game frame obliquely from the back. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage forming part on the back surface of a game frame. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a diagram showing a rotational state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along the line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP of FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ of FIG. FIG. 21 is a sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. FIG. 21 is a sectional view taken along the line SS of FIG. (A) is a staying state of the screw member when the ball fixing member is in the first state, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line TT of (A), and (C) is a state when the ball fixing member is in the second state. The stagnant state of the screw member, (D) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line UU of (C). It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage forming part which shows the moving state of a screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage forming part which shows the moving state of the game ball on the cover part. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the game machine in the feature part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface in the state which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern branched from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground region formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground region formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the connection mode of the low voltage component and the high voltage component mounted on the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which the game control board in Example 1 is housed in a board case. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1 and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on a solder surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 is attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 is attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in relation to the connection of the game control microcomputer, the input circuit, and the output circuit on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in relation to the connection of the game control microcomputer, the input circuit, and the output circuit on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram relating to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit on the game control board according to the second embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is the perspective view from the upper part of the specific electronic component, (B) is the lower part of the specific electronic component. It is a perspective view from. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3. FIG. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing a rotation display of a hold display in each hold display area, and (C) is a diagram showing a movement display of a telop in a telop display area. , (D) is a diagram showing a blinking mode of the fourth symbol. It is explanatory drawing of the image data which constitutes the display in an image display apparatus. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. This is a part of the flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the chance up effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α1. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach α3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β1. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β2. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β3. It is a timing chart which shows the variable display of super reach β3. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 1st reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 1st reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 3rd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 3rd reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 2nd reach effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect in the modification. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the 4th reach effect in the modification.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of the first form is
A storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P) and a storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201)
A payout unit (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out game media, and
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion. And the second guide passage forming part 204),
It is characterized by having.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
A cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, a cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, a cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, and a cover portion of the third cover body 330. With 334)
The cover portion restricts the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion from falling to the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). (For example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) are provided for this purpose (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the third embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
The predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) is provided so as to be able to drop from the cover portion without retaining the game medium that has fallen on the cover portion. It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined limiting portion, and the state in which the screw member can always stay can be maintained. Therefore, the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion falls into the guide passage forming portion. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine of the fourth form is the gaming machine according to the second or third form.
The predetermined limiting portion is a first retaining portion (for example, elongated hole 316A) capable of retaining a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has fallen on the cover portion on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (for example, recessed grooves 326A to 326C).
The second retention portion is provided at a position closer to the payout portion (for example, the payout device 200) than the first retention portion, and is larger than the first retention portion (L22B> L21).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the screw member tends to stay in the retention portion as it approaches the payout portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the fifth form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth forms.
The payout portion (for example, a payout device) of a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). A plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement to the 200) are provided (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment.
The specific limiting portion is a plurality of hole portions (for example, hole portions 271A to 271H).
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size capable of dropping the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion before reaching the payout portion. Has (L11> L2, see FIG. 11)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped from the hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member mixed in the guiding passage forming portion is mixed in the payout portion. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game medium from being hindered by the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.
The plurality of holes have different sizes.
The largest predetermined hole among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the payout (for example, the left-right dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the left-right dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. (See Fig. 12)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion. ..

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh aspect.
On the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202), the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330). There is an uncovered area (eg, uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover section 334) of the
At least a part (for example, holes 271B to 271H) of the plurality of specific restriction portions is provided at a position corresponding to the uncovered region in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the screw member is mixed into the guide passage forming portion from the uncovered region, it can be dropped from the hole portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects.
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) is provided.
The storage unit
It is arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first protruding portion 224) of the game frame.
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter the upper surface of the predetermined portion (see L30 <L1, FIG. 19 (B)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion and the storage portion of the game frame and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of the tenth form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth forms.
A first substrate (for example, a main substrate 11, an effect control substrate 12, etc.) attached at a position lower than the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202).
A second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion,
With
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using a screw member, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member (for example, the board cases 11A, 12A and the like are screw members. The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a locking means including a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members. (See Fig. 17)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the eleventh form is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect.
The second board is an external output board (for example, terminal board 210) to which wiring (for example, cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the game machine is connected.
The first substrate has a smaller number of wires to be connected than the external output substrate (for example, a plurality of connection hole portions 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202). The number of cables C that can be connected to the cable C is the first number (for example, 20), while the second main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide passage forming portion 202 are connected. Each signal line is also connected to the board, but the number is the second number (for example, 10 lines), which is less than the first number.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is easily subjected to an external force during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached by the screw member, so that the screw member comes off due to the external force applied to the external output board. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the 12th form is the gaming machine according to the 10th or 11th form.
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) and
A mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board on the game frame,
With
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame limiting portion (for example, a recess 242) for restricting the movement of a screw member dropped onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion by utilizing the mounting frame of the external output substrate.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to the twelfth forms.
The guide passage of a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has moved toward the guide passage forming portion around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). Special limiting portions (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to limit the fall to the forming portion (FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), 24. reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the 14th form is the gaming machine according to the 13th form.
The special restriction portion attaches a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. A special retention portion (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attachment portion.
The screw member that has come off from the attached portion but has not retained in the special retaining portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the 15th form is the gaming machine according to the 13th or 14th form.
The special retaining portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a part of the screw member.
The depth of the recess is a depth at which a part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is housed (see FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member staying in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of the 16th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 15th forms.
A cover portion (for example, a cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) is provided.
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the payout portion side.
A specific portion (for example, a ball stopper 340) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen on the cover portion in the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side in the inclined direction of the cover portion (FIG. 15, FIG. 26, FIG. 27)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The game machine of the 17th form is the game machine according to the 16th form.
The specific portion (for example, the ball stop member 340) has a first state in which the game medium (for example, the game ball P) of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) can flow down. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game medium of the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is located in the upright position, and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344. Then, in the first state in which the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is located at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. The game ball can be brought into contact with the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 can be changed to a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down (or is difficult to flow down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204.) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member is more likely to stay than in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 18th form is the gaming machine according to the 16th or 17th form.
The cover part
A first cover portion (for example, a first cover portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336)) capable of retaining a screw member dropped on the cover portion on the cover portion. For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
Unlike the first cover portion, the second cover portion provided with the specific portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) and
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 19th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 18th aspect.
The second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, a flange portion F) (FIG. 8). reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 20th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 19th forms.
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) is provided.
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members having a locking portion (for example, screw members N11 to N14).
The screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is such that the screw member falls outside the guide passage forming portion even if it comes off from the game frame. It is installed (see Fig. 8)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is hard to come off from the game frame, while the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion falls out of the guide passage forming portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 21st embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 20th embodiment.
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the gaming frame (for example, the gaming machine frame 3). Among them, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the peripheral edge of the game machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the form 22 is the gaming machine according to the form 20 or 21.
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are for reinforcing the game frame. It is attached to a metal member (for example, metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the storage portion can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 20 to 22.
The screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to the upper position of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are It is characterized in that it is a screw member different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 24th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 20th to 23rd forms.
A game board (for example, a game board 2) that can be attached to and detached from the game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) is provided.
In the region below the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game board, the upper portion of the inclined surface (for example, the cover body 220) on which the falling screw member can flow down. Wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20, 27).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board from bouncing and being mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of the 25th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 24th forms.
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of the first modification 1) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) is provided.
The guide passage forming portion is
A first passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) extending so as to incline downward toward one side (for example, the left side), and
A second passage forming portion (for example, a second guide passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion, and
Have,
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion moves and falls from the lower end portion to the outside of the guiding passage forming portion (FIG. 29 (FIG. 29). A) See)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 26th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 2nd to 25th forms.
Wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided at a position in the vicinity of the predetermined limiting portion (for example, the recess 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of the modified example 1) so as to intersect the guide passage forming portion. (See Fig. 29 (B))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member is easily caught in the wiring and stays in the predetermined limiting portion.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is the rear. Further, the description will be described with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area Y. Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin, and is formed in a substantially square shape in front view. It is composed of a board surface plate provided with (not shown), a guide rail 2b, and the like, and a spacer member integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate. The game board 2 is formed of a non-translucent member such as a veneer board in a substantially square shape in front view, and is provided on a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 2b, etc. on the front game board surface. May be configured.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area Y). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5. A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area), a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning opening is used. It is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the starting winning opening door is in the open position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second). It is also said that the starting winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device including an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces. Further, when a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area Y). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area Y, an out opening (not shown) is provided to which a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings is taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are provided around the game area Y. Has been done. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area Y by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device ( A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) for storing) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is a payout exit where prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. A hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) may be provided.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area Y. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area Y so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area Y by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probability variation state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It is not necessary that there is a "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board 37 (see FIG. 3), an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board 91 (see FIG. 3) are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, a random number value for determining a special figure display result, determining a jackpot type, determining a fluctuation pattern, or the like. Are extracted and stored (stored) at the highest level of free entries in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the start winning process is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit and the second special figure hold storage unit, and the special figure display result. Based on the numerical data indicating the random value for judgment, it is decided (predetermined) whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is a "big hit" before the variation display result is derived and displayed. Executes normal design processing. That is, when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the special figure game, whether or not to derive and display the jackpot display result as the display result of the variable display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the back structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a frame for a game machine to which a game board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. The glass door frame 50 is not shown in FIGS. 5 to 7.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 has a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 to which the game board 2 is detachably provided, and the game centering on the left side of the game machine frame 3. The game hall has a glass door frame 50 provided so that the front surface of the machine frame 3 can be opened and closed, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 that supports the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable around the left side. By fixing the outer frame 60 to the game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper part of the back surface of the game machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4) is provided from a circulation path of a game ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a game ball P) provided inside a game island (not shown). A ball tank forming portion 201 forming a storage portion capable of storing the game balls supplied via the ball tank forming portion 201 and a first guide passage for guiding the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the left side are formed. The first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first passage forming body 203 including the first guide passage forming portion 202 are extended in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the gaming machine frame 3. Further, a terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202.

The replenishment device 150 sends out a predetermined number (for example, 10 or the like) of a guide member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the game balls in the circulation path of the game island and the game balls guided by the guide member 150A. The sprocket (not shown), the drive source for driving the sprocket (not shown), and the outer frame 60 are pressed against the gaming machine frame 3 when the opening is closed by the gaming machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game ball sent out by the sprocket is the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket is held so that it cannot be dropped. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming unit 201 decreases when the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the sprocket is rotated by the drive source and a predetermined number of game balls are sent out by the ball tank forming unit 201. It is supposed to be supplied to. Further, in the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is formed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown), and the case body 150B uses a plurality of screw members (not shown) to form a game island. It is fixed in place.

Further, a second guide passage forming portion 204 forming a second guide passage for guiding the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide passage forming portion 202 and a game guided by the second guide passage forming portion 204. A payout device 200 constituting a payout unit capable of paying out balls and a game ball paid out by the payout device 200 are guided to an upper plate, that is, a payout passage for paying out the game ball to a player is formed. Pachinko game to discharge the game ball guided by the payout passage forming unit 205 and the second guide passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205. A second passage forming body 207 including a ball removing passage forming portion 206 for forming a ball removing passage for guiding to a discharge portion (not shown) provided in the lower portion on the back side of the machine 1 and a gaming machine frame 3 It extends vertically along the left side of the back of the building.

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has a sprocket for paying out game balls by a predetermined number of balls (for example, one ball), a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game. A switching valve that can switch the flow path of the ball between the payout passage and the ball removing passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, a board case 91A in which the power supply board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided in the lower part of the back surface of the game machine frame 3.

In the present embodiment, a ball-out switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position in the second guide passage, and the CPU 103 detects a detection signal from the ball-out switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there is a game ball to be paid out to the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200. Then, when the off state of the ball out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that the game ball is not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and the ball is paid out. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. Further, by displaying a replenishment error on a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 and outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the glass door frame 50 is connected to the effect control CPU 120. It is possible to execute a notification process indicating that a replenishment error has occurred, such as by causing the game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined position on the front surface to emit light in an error mode.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the game machine frame 3 in the opening 221 formed in the substantially central portion of the game machine frame 3. The game board 2 includes a plate-shaped body 2a composed of the above-mentioned board surface plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-shaped body 2a, and a plate-shaped body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side of the above, an effect device having a movable body 32, a substrate case 12A in which the effect control board 12 is housed, and a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is housed, and a plate shape. It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, an effect device, an electronic component, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are configured so that each substrate can be housed inside by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. Among these, the substrate cases 11A and 12A have. The board cases 91A and 37A are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by one or a plurality of screw members N20 and N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A and 37A are attached to the game machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Alternatively, it is attached to the game board 2. Further, the cover body 220 is formed in a box shape in which the front surface is opened by a transparent synthetic resin material, and a part of the back surface is an opening / closing portion 220A that can rotate around the right side, and is one of the back surfaces of the game board 2. The part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the first passage forming body 203 and the second passage forming body 207 provided on the back surface of the game machine frame 3 and the cover body 220 forming the back surface of the game board 2 are used for the game. In a state where the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3, the outer frame 60 projects rearward from the outer frame 60. In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged at the rear position of the upper plate of the outer frame 60 in the upper part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3. In a state where the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 is fixed to the game island (not shown), the game ball can be supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from the circulation path above the game island via the replenishment device 150. ..

(Mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203)
Next, the structure for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing a structure for attaching the passage forming body to the frame for a game machine. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper part of the back surface of the game machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game machine frame 3 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in the front view, and an opening 221 for mounting the game board 2 is formed, and is above the opening 221. A metal plate 222 for reinforcement is provided on the back surface of the upper side portion 3A so as to face in the left-right direction. Further, on the back surface of the metal plate 222, an attachment member 223 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 is attached.

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so that the metal plate 222 can be covered from the back side, and the screw members N1 to N5 mounted from the back side to a plurality of mounting holes H1 to H5 facing in the front-rear direction are attached to the metal plate 222. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by being screwed into each of the formed plurality of screw holes. A plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 is projected rearward on the right side of the mounting member 223, and is composed of an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C on the left side of the mounting member 223. A three-dimensional second protruding portion 225 is projected rearward.

The first protruding portion 224 protrudes rearward from a position below the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225, and the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. Further, a first guide passage forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second protruding portion 225, and a board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side in the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper part in a state where the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. The screw member N6 is screwed into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223 to be mounted on the mounting member 223.

As described above, the mounting member 223 is formed so as to cover the upper part of the game board 2 by having the first protruding portion 224 and the second protruding portion 225 protruding rearward. Therefore, it is prevented that the game ball or the like supplied from the upper part of the game island to the ball tank forming portion 201 enters the game board 2. That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2.

The first passage forming body 203 has a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the back side, and a plurality of screw members N15 attached to the mounting holes H15 from the upper side in the mounting member 223. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by being screwed into each screw hole. The screw member N12 to be attached to the mounting hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming body 203 to the first passage forming body 203. Further, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing the screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into the screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. There is.

As shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 8, the above-mentioned screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are composed of a male screw portion NS and a head NH, of which the screw members N1, N2 and N11 to N16 are heads. A flanged screw in which a flange portion F as a locking portion is integrally formed on the seat surface of the screw, and by widening the ground contact area of the seat surface and increasing the frictional force, it is harder to loosen than the screw members N3 to N6. It is a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 is about 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is about 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is the head NH. It is said to be about 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2 of.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to the above-mentioned dimensions. Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 made of flanged screws are screw members in which a flange portion F (washer) is integrally formed, but instead of the flange portion F, a washer separate from the screw member. May be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member shall include a member such as a screw or a bolt that is separated from the attached portion when loosened. Further, the loosening prevention portion also includes a rotation stopper portion of the head NH and an adhesive and the like formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer).

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage forming body 203 needs to receive and store the game ball supplied from above the game island by the ball tank forming portion 201, and also has the first guiding passage. In the above, the upper surface is formed in a concave shape so that the ball clogging is less likely to occur and the upper surface can be easily cleared when the ball clogging occurs.

Further, the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the ball tank forming portion 201 where the game balls that overlap and stay in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. The game ball is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the third cover body 330 at the position where the first guide passage forming portion 202 flows into the second guide passage forming portion 204. Is designed to be rectified. However, a part of the upper surface opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered by the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330, but the ball tank forming portion 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( The top opening of (see FIG. 27) is open.

On the other hand, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 to be attached to the game machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203. Further, above the pachinko gaming machine 1 fixed to the gaming island, a screw member (not shown) for assembling a skeleton or the like constituting the gaming island, and various devices arranged inside the gaming island (for example,). A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishment device 150 and the like to the skeleton and the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members loosen and fall off due to vibration or impact generated in the game island or pachinko game machine 1, they roll due to vibration or impact or opening / closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first There is a possibility that the guide passage forming portion 202 may fall inward from the uncovered region 350 and be mixed into the guide passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity immediately above the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, and by sending a predetermined number of game balls to the ball tank forming portion 201, the game island Since it is a device that easily vibrates when a new game ball is supplied from the circulation path of the game machine or when the game machine frame 3 opens and closes, a screw member for attaching the replenishment device 150 to the skeleton of the game island or the like ( (Not shown) or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 loosen due to vibration and fall off, the inside of the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202. Very likely to fall into.

Then, when the screw member falls on the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member may move toward the payout device 200 side along with the flow of the game ball and finally be mixed in the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket and the switching valve are damaged by the screw member, the ball is clogged and the payout motor is loaded and malfunctions, or the screw member is a player together with the game ball. There was a risk that the player would feel uncomfortable or distrustful.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is mixed with the payout device 200, and the payout device 200 is damaged or malfunctions, or the screw member is formed together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to prevent the player from being paid out.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. 10A and 10B are a plan view showing a first passage forming body, and FIG. 10B is a rear view showing a first passage forming body. 11A is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10A, FIG. 11B is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 10A, and FIG. It is a figure. 12A and 12B are a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and FIG. 12B is a sectional view taken along line DD of FIG. 12A. 13A and 13B are a plan view showing a first cover body, FIG. 13B is a sectional view taken along line EE of FIG. 13A, and FIG. 13C is a sectional view taken along line FF of FIG. 14A and 14B are a plan view showing a second cover body, FIG. 14B is a sectional view taken along line GG of FIG. 14A, and FIG. 14C is a sectional view taken along line HH of FIG. 14A. 15A and 15B are a plan view showing a third cover body, FIG. 15B is a sectional view taken along line II of FIG. 15A, FIG. 15C is a sectional view taken along line JJ of FIG. 3 The perspective view which shows the cover body, (E) is the perspective view which shows the ball stop member. 16A and 16B are vertical cross-sectional views showing a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stop member is in the first state, and FIG. 16B is a first view showing a state in which the ball stop member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view which shows the guide passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has an upper surface formed by a bottom wall portion 203A and a standing wall portion 203B erected on the peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 203A. It has a ball tank forming portion 201 which is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape and is arranged on the right side, and a first guide passage forming portion 202 which is arranged on the left side. The ball tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed from an upstream portion extending diagonally rearward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The size of the ball tank forming portion 201 in the front-rear direction is longer than the dimension of the first guidance passage forming portion 202 in the front-rear direction, and more game balls can be stored than the first guidance passage forming portion 202. Has been done. Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the bottom wall portion 203A is supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201. The game ball naturally flows down with the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 facing the left side.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are vertically formed in the mounting piece 261. .. Further, a mounting piece 265 is projected from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the left side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 is projected forward on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B on the front side of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 263.

Then, the first passage forming body 203 is attached to the game machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into the screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. Further, a recess 280 having a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view is formed at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, holes 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A and the rear standing wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 (the holes 270A and 270B are formed. (See FIG. 11 (A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed at substantially the center of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B toward the downstream side. Further, in the bottom wall portion 203A of the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, a communication hole 272 for dropping the game ball is formed through the lower second guide passage forming portion 204. ..

In the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, a meandering portion 273 that causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side is formed, and among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, the holes 271B to 271F are formed. Is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273. By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the following ball is prevented from increasing.

Further, the separation dimension L10 of the lower portions of the standing wall portions 203B and 203B before and after the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and twice the diameter (about 22 mm). It is shorter than (11 mm <L10 <22 mm). That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed so that the game ball can be guided in a row toward the downstream side.

Since the front-rear dimensions L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B are slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N3 to N6 described above (L11> L2), the screw members N3 to N3 to be described later. Even when N6 is mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can be dropped from the holes 271A to 271H. Further, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest left-right dimension L12 (dimension in the flow direction of the game ball) as compared with the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are the connecting holes 272. Can be reliably dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching.

That is, these hole portions 271A to 271H form a specific restriction portion for restricting the movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200. Since dust, dust, or some other member other than the screw member can also fall from the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, it is possible to prevent ball clogging.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13 (A) to 13 (C), the first cover body 310 extends along the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and extends along the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. A U-shaped mounting portion 311 that can be fitted from above, a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the right side to the rear side of the mounting portion 311 and a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the lower side to the right side (ball tank formation). A plate-shaped ball holding portion 313 extending downward so as to be inclined downward toward the portion 201 side), and a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the standing wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side). It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D formed so as to be elastically deformable on the front side of the portion 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314.

In the first cover body 310 configured in this way, the mounting portion 311 is attached to the ball tank forming portion 201 in a state where the standing wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. By fitting the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged so as to cover a part of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is one on the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The portion is covered from above, and the upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly inclined downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 side (see FIG. 9).

In a state where the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming portion 201 side, so that the game island (not shown) becomes the ball tank forming portion 201. Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to be stacked in the vertical direction, when the game balls flow down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side, they are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball holding portion 313. It is supposed to be done.

The cover portion 314 is formed with elongated holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction forming a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, penetrating vertically in a state of being arranged in a row so as to be parallel to each other. The front and rear dimensions L21 of each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C are all the same, and the front and rear dimensions L21 are shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21 <2R, L21 <L2). That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C are formed in such a size that the game ball and the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 cannot be dropped. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheral edges of the elongated holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314.

Further, since the elongated holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flow direction of the gaming ball, the gaming ball P falls above the elongated holes 316A to 316C as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C. If so, the game ball P can move in the flow direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14 (A) to 14 (C), the second cover body 320 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and a cover portion. It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B formed elastically deformably on the front and rear sides of the 324, and the right end portion of the cover portion 324 is attached to the left end portion of the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310. The first passage forming body 203 is formed by elastically locking the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B to the locked portions 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B in a state of being close to each other. Can be attached to. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball (FIG. 9). reference).

Recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 324 in a state of being arranged in a row with each other. The concave grooves 326A to 326C have different front-rear dimensions L22A to L22C, but are shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A to L22C <2R). The front-rear dimension L22B of the central concave groove 326B having the longest front-rear dimension is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L22B> L2). That is, the concave groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate the game ball and can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the concave groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the elongated holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B> L21).

Further, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the concave groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the concave groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B> L1, L22C> L1). ), At least the size is such that the male threaded portion NS can be accommodated.

Further, since the concave grooves 326A to 326C are extended along the flow direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the flow direction of the game ball, FIGS. 14 (B) and 14 (C) As shown in the above, when the game ball P falls on the upper part of the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flow direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15 (A) to 15 (C) and FIG. 16, the third cover body 330 has a plate-shaped cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. , Mounting that is projected from above between a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D formed elastically deformably on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334 and the locking portions 335C and 335D on the back surface, and the screw member N15 is mounted from above. It is mainly composed of a mounting portion 331 formed with a hole H15 and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the upper left end portion of the cover portion 334, and a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D at the left end of the cover portion 324 stand on the wall. It is elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. By entering, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a recess 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion on the upper surface toward the left side. Since a part on the right side approaches the meandering portion 273, it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering portion 273. Further, at the position corresponding to the recess 336, a slit 337 having a horizontally long U-shape in a plan view is formed, so that a rectifying plate 338 that can be elastically deformed so that the left end side swings in the vertical direction is formed. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 that inclines downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked vertically are leveled while being guided to be pressed against the bottom wall portion 203A. (See FIG. 16).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L23). > 2R, L23> L2). That is, the recess 336 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the head NHs of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23> L22B).

Further, since the recess 336 is extended along the flow direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball, the recess 336 is as shown in FIG. 15 (D). When the game ball P falls on the upper part of the 336, the game ball P is guided in the flow direction (left side).

Further, since the front-rear dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L24 <L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ~ N16 does not fall from the slit 337.

The ball stopper 340 includes a plate-shaped front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape in the rear view, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the back side of the front wall portion 341A, and a front wall portion 341A and a rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a left wall portion 341C to be connected, a protruding wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B that rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. Further, a slit 344 into which the front wall portion 341A can be inserted is formed on the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334.

As shown in FIG. 16, when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the cover portion 324 covers the upper part of the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since the cover portion 324 is arranged so as to incline downward toward the downstream side (left side) so as to approach the bottom wall portion 203A, the game balls P stacked vertically in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are placed. It is leveled while flowing down so that it can finally flow out one by one from the connecting hole 272. In particular, since the rectifying plate 338 can be elastically deformed when the game balls come into contact with each other, the rectifying plate 338 is leveled (rectified) so as to push the game balls downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16A, the ball stopper 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and an inclining position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right, and the rotating portion 341 Is located in the upright position, and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the rotation. The portion 341 is located at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 cannot flow down (or flows down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204. It is possible to change to the second state (difficult), that is, the ball stop state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 in the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204. Therefore, in this state, the game in the second guide passage forming portion 204 It is possible to remove the ball and remove the payout device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the ball stopper 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C are formed. The space portion surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in a plan view functions as a retention portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can stay, as will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the ball stopper 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 is tilted, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the protruding wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 based on FIG. 17A and 17B are perspective views showing a board mounting frame on which a terminal board is mounted, FIG. 17B is a KK cross section of (A), and FIG. 17C is an LL cross section of (B). ..

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and a cable connection portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is attached / detached to the back surface (not shown). ) And a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. A connection pinch (not shown) for sandwiching the tip of each cable C is provided at a position corresponding to each connection hole 231 inside the mounting member 232. A spring (not shown) for urging the connection pinch in the closing direction, that is, in the direction of sandwiching the tip of the cable C is provided. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation units 233 for releasing each connection pinch (not shown) against the urging force of the spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202 is the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to the second substrate such as the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 provided below the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the number of the second is less than the first number. The number (for example, 10) is set.

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the connection hole portions 231 and have a substantially hook shape in a side view, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end side thereof as a swing shaft. When opening the connection pinch (not shown) described above, the connection pinch (not shown) is released by pressing the operation unit 233 upward or downward to swing the operation unit 233. Then, when the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole 231 with the connection pinch open and the pressing operation of the operation unit 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the urging force of the spring (not shown). Cable C will be held. The operation units 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that the adjacent operation units 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation when the predetermined operation unit 233 is pressed. There is.

The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side in the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper part in a state where the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. The screw member N6 is screwed into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223 to be mounted on the mounting member 223. Further, the substrate mounting frame 211 is formed with a horizontally long rectangular opening 234.

On the inner surface of the board mounting frame 211, a plurality of regulating portions 235 that regulate the forward movement of the terminal board 210 by locking to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portions 235 forward the terminal board 210. A plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose movement is restricted from the front side, and a positioning piece 237 that abuts on the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 to determine the arrangement position. Have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and the locking portion 236 is elastically locked in a state where the movement to the front is restricted by the plurality of regulating portions 235 to mount the terminal board. It is attached to the frame 211. That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members (by a mounting method different from the mounting method using the screw members). Can be installed.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, the operation unit 233 corresponding to each cable C is formed during the wiring work for connecting the plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231. Need to be operated. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 for inspection or the like, the cable C hanging from the upper part of the game island is the outer frame. The connection may be tensioned by being routed forward of the 60. That is, since the terminal board 210 tends to be loaded on the mounting portion, when the terminal board 210 is mounted on the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 by the screw member, the screw member loosens and easily comes off. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is mounted by a mounting method that does not use the screw member. ing.

Further, in a state where the terminal board 210 is mounted on the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operation portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the back side from the opening 234 (see FIG. 17 (A)). ). Further, since the plurality of operation units 233 project substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation units 233 arranged side by side as described later. Further, a recess 242 capable of accommodating the screw members N3 to N6 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211.

(Attached state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting states of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is viewed from diagonally behind. 19A is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame, and FIG. 19B is a sectional view taken along line MM of FIG. 19A. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame. 22A is a sectional view taken along the line NN of FIG. 21, FIG. 22B is a sectional view showing a rotational state of the screw member, and FIG. 22C is a sectional view taken along the line OO of FIG. 23 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP of FIG. 21, and FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ of FIG. FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR of FIG. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS of FIG. 26A and 26B show a retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, FIG. 26B is a sectional view taken along the line TT of FIG. 26A, and FIG. 26C is a second state of the ball stopper. The staying state of the screw member at the time of (D) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line UU of (C). FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 9, 18 and 19 (A), the ball tank forming portion 201 on the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3 and its periphery are screw members N1 to for mounting the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222. Screw members N11, N12, and N15 for attaching N2 and the first passage forming body 203 to the attachment member 223 are attached.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached from the back side to the front at a position separated from the ball tank forming portion 201 to the right side and below the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B in the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 loosen due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and fall out rearward, it is extremely unlikely that they will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. ..

Because the screw members N11 and N12 are attached from the back side to the front on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper end edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 loosen due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and fall out rearward, it is extremely unlikely that they will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG.

Since the screw member N15 is attached from the upper side to the lower side on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position lower than the upper end edge of the ball tank forming portion 201, pachinko game Even if the screw member N15 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the machine 1 and falls off upward, it is extremely unlikely that the screw member N15 will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 form a ball tank in which the game balls supplied by the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island are received and stored, and the load of a large number of game balls is applied. Since it is arranged around the portion 201, vibration and impact are likely to occur. Therefore, a threaded member with a flange is used because the contact area with the attached portion is large and loosening is unlikely to occur.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the ball tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 even if they loosen and fall off, that is, the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201. Since it is arranged below, it may be mixed into the ball tank forming portion 201 which opens upward to receive and store the game balls supplied by the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. It is suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the ball tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 that protrudes rearward in the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 is shorter than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw member (L30 <L1), so that the bottom It is unlikely that the screw member is sandwiched between the wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 and is held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201.

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the ball tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is formed from the head L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. (L3> L2), the flanged screw member is hardly caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 (B), if the screw member N15 falls out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls on the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H becomes Since the screw member N15 that has fallen flows down to either the rear or the left because it is inclined downward toward the back surface side, it is hardly held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from being mixed into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, 91A provided below the ball tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20 and 21 (A), screw members N3 to N5 for mounting the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and a substrate are provided in and around the first guide passage forming portion 202. The screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 on the mounting member 223, the screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 on the mounting member 223, and the third cover body 330 are attached to the first guiding passage forming portion 202. A screw member N16 for attaching to the screw member N16 is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are directed from the back side to the front at a position above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B in the first guide passage forming portion 202. The screw member is mounted by arranging the second protruding portion 225 of the mounting member 223 between the mounting positions of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the first guide passage forming portion 202 is separated to some extent from the mounting positions of each of N3 to N6, the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the pachinko gaming machine When the screw members N3 to N6 loosen and fall out rearward due to the vibration or impact generated in 1, the screw members N3 to N6 move rearward on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A corresponding to the mounting hole H3, a concave groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head NH when the screw member N3 is mounted on the mounting hole H3 is linear toward the rear. It is extended to. The concave groove 227 is formed so that the left and right widths are tapered toward the rear side and become shallower. However, since the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A is inclined downward toward the back side, the concave groove is formed. The bottom surface of the 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly inclined downward toward the back surface side).

Therefore, if the screw member N3 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 will fall into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 (FIG. FIG. 22 (A)). Further, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the concave groove 227 is likely to be guided so as to move linearly toward the rear when vibration or impact occurs, but the concave groove 227 is substantially horizontal toward the rear. The screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than the region other than the concave groove 227. That is, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202.

Here, all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male screw portion NS, and when they fall on the upper surface of the flat upper wall portion 225A, the peripheral edge of the head NH and the male screw portion NS Since the screw member N3 tilted as shown in FIG. 22 (B) is often in a tilted posture when the two points are in contact with the tip (see FIG. 22 (A)), vibration or impact occurs. Occasionally, the head NH may rotate around the tip of the male screw portion NS so as to swing its head, and its direction may change. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the concave groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the concave groove 227, it may move linearly toward the rear or the head. The NH may move to turn to the left or right by rotating like shaking its head. That is, as shown by an arrow in FIG. 20, when it moves so as to bend to the right toward the rear, it is highly likely that it falls on the first cover body 310, and when it moves linearly toward the rear, it is the first. There is a high possibility that the cover body 320 will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage when the cover body 320 is moved so as to bend to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the concave groove 227 and then moves so as to bend rearward to the right, the first cover body. There is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover portion 314 of 310. As shown in FIG. 22 (A), when the screw member N3 falls on the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male screw portion NS intersects the elongated holes 316A to 316C, or the male screw portion NS becomes Although it is inserted into any of the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the head NH is locked without falling off, so that the head NH does not fall from the cover portion 314 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 and stays on the cover portion 314. Will be done. That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C cause the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiting unit for limiting.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end and then linearly moved rearward, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 of the body 203. As shown in FIG. 22C, when the screw member N3 falls on the cover portion 324, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male screw portion NS intersects the concave grooves 326A to 326C, or the male screw portion NS or the like. Since a part of the head NH is housed in the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the head NH does not fall from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 but stays on the cover portion 324. That is, the concave grooves 326A to 326C cause the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 324 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiting unit for limiting.

Further, when the product falls on the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second protruding portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is placed on the horizontal wall portion 264. It stays in a state of being inclined to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion Since the recess 290 that opens upward is formed by the 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B, and the horizontal wall portion 264, the recess 290 is accommodated and stays in the recess 290. That is, the recess 290 is a screw member provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of N3 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and slightly above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B in the first passage forming body 203. It is mounted in the mounting hole H13 formed in the mounting piece 263, which is the position. Therefore, if the screw member N13 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, it may fall into the recess 280 formed in the vicinity of the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. High (see FIG. 23 (A)). Specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, whereby the upper wall portion Since a recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by the 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, it is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23 (B), when the screw member N13 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls off rearward, it is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may fall and stay in the recess 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211. That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and is a screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of N13 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H4. Therefore, if the screw member N4 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves rearward so as to bend to the right, or linearly moves rearward. In any case of moving so as to bend to the right, as shown in FIG. 24, the board mount frame 211 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 that has fallen from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and is accommodated and stays in the recess 242 formed by the substrate mounting frame 211 and the terminal substrate 210, or the substrate mounting frame. Although the male screw portion NS is inserted into the recess 243 formed between the 211 and the vertical wall portion 203B, the head NH may stay because it is locked without falling off. That is, the recess 242 and the recess 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of the screw member N4 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation units 233. Further, in the state where the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, since a plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 3), these cables C may prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operation unit 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the falling of the screw member N4 that has been made to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves so as to bend rearward and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body is opened at the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The first guide passage forming portion 202 from the uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, which is not covered by any of the 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330. Fall into. The screw member N4 that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P, falls out from between the game balls, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from any of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the uncovered region 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, even if it does not fall from any of the holes 271B to 271D, it finally falls from any of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. That is, the holes 271A to 271H form a specific restriction portion for restricting the movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 slips out of the mounting hole H4 and moves so as to bend to the left toward the rear and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, it is placed on the recess 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By falling, the cover portion 334 does not fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202, but is housed in the recess 336 and stays there. That is, the recess 336 is for limiting the drop of the screw member N4 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Consists of a predetermined restriction part of.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls off rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N6 will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided to move linearly rearward by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward. After that, when it is moved so as to bend to the right side, as shown in FIG. 25, it falls to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper 340 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. As described with reference to FIG. 16, the cover portion 334 covers the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to incline downward toward the downstream side (payout device 200 side), so that the cover portion 334 is on the cover portion 334. The screw member N6 that has fallen to a position near the upstream side of the ball fixing member 340 in the above is likely to move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved to the downstream side comes into contact with the ball stopper 340 provided at the downstream side end portion (left end portion) that is the lower side of the cover portion 334, and is brought into contact with the downstream side (the left end portion). By restricting the movement to the left side), it stays on the cover portion 334.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stopper 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. Since the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the wall portion having a substantially U-shape in a plan view composed of the left wall portion 341C, the screw member N6 is held without dropping from the cover portion 334. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26 (C) and 26 (D), when the ball stopper 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage, so that the screw member N6 is inserted into the protruding wall. Since it can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334.

In the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is only arranged so as to intersect with respect to the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may fall backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front and rear left sides of the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted are covered with the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. It can be more reliably retained than in the second state where the left wall portion 341C is located only on the left side. That is, the ball stopper 340 is provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 in the cover portion 334. doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front right side in the mounting member 223, and is located above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged directly behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut in the middle. Since it has been scratched, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it falls on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225, but before reaching the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a high possibility that the upper wall portion 225A will fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw member N16 is attached to the mounting hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N5 will fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. ..

(Action / effect)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a screw member provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 N3 to N6, etc. loosen due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and fall off, and move backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibration or impact or opening / closing of the gaming machine frame 3, and then cover. When it falls on the portions 314, 324 and 334, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the recesses 336 and the ball stopper 340 restrict the fall to the first guide passage forming portion 202. A screw that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 because there is a high possibility that the cover portion 314, 324, 334 will stay on the cover portion 314, 324, 334 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It is possible to prevent the members from moving and being mixed into the payout device 200. Further, since a vertical wall portion is formed at the left (downstream side) end of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left side, it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the regions other than the uncovered region 350 are covered by the cover portions 314, 324 and 334, but the ball tank forming portion 201 Even if the replenished game ball spills and gets on the cover parts 314 and 324 on the upstream side, the front-rear dimensions of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C are from the diameter 2R of the game ball P. The game ball P rolls to the left side, then falls from the left end of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered region 350 and is returned to the inside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has been placed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned to the inside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also the game ball P stays in the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the falling screw member N stays is limited, or the falling screw member N comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be prevented.

When the game ball falls on the cover portion 334, it flows down on the cover portion 334 toward the left side and the flow is regulated by the ball stop member 340, or it falls out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. To do.

Further, in the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the elongated holes 316A to 316C. The front-rear dimension L22B is larger than the front-rear dimension L22 of the elongated hole 316B (L22B> L21). By doing so, the screw member tends to stay in the retention portion as it approaches the payout device 200, so that the screw member that has fallen on the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It can be prevented from doing so.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 move due to vibration or impact, and are not covered provided between the cover portion 324 and the cover portion 334. When it falls from the area 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the uncovered area 350. Even if it falls directly inward, it falls out from between the game balls and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P in the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a result, the screw member falls from any of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the payout device 200. It is possible to suppress mixing.

Further, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the middle flow portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion in the first guide passage forming portion 202, and are formed in the ball tank forming portion 201. There is a region in which no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B formed at close positions and the hole 271A on the most upstream side of the holes 271A to 271H. As described above, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a vertically stacked state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A near the upstream portion in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which the ball pressure is applied.

Further, by forming the region in which the hole portion is not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this way, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. It is possible to appropriately suppress the entry into the inside of the cover body 220 from the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 6) or the like.

Further, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be suppressed from falling, and the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 can be prevented from being mixed into the payout device 200 without falling to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. be able to.

Further, since the largest hole 271H among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, the screw member can be preferably removed from the hole 271H outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350, the game ball is formed in the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350. The screw members are often located at the upper part of the game ball because the screws are stacked one above the other, but the hole 271H is arranged on the downstream side of the straightening vane 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, Since the game ball is arranged at a position where it is rectified in one upper and lower stages, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is not covered. Even if it is mixed from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be dropped from the holes 271B to 271D to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, at least some of the holes 271B to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided on the payout device 200 side of the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, as described above. Even when the game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it approaches downward while moving along with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Since the probability of this is high, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are referred to the first guide passage forming portion. The recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the mounting holes H3 to H6 as the attachment portions. The screw members N3 to N6, which are provided in the above and are separated from the mounting holes H3 to H6 but do not stay in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242 and 243, can be moved toward the cover portions 314, 324 and 334. It is possible to prevent the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are the depths at which a part of the screw members N3 to N6 protrudes when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 staying in 214, 242, and 243 can be easily taken out.

Further, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, the above-mentioned elongated holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 restrict the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only (or obstructing), but also because it is a retention portion that can be retained outside the first guide passage forming portion 202, a clerk of a game hall or the like finds a screw member when performing an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easy to take measures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the ball stopping member 340 as the specific portion, the rotating portion 341 is located in the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344, and the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is guided to the second guide. In the first state where the passage forming portion 204 can flow down, the rotating portion 341 is located at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to change to the second state in which the game ball cannot flow down (or is difficult to flow down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the first state is when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state. Since the screw member is more likely to stay than in the above case, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

More specifically, as described above, the ball stop member 340 is set to the second state when the game balls in the first guide passage and the second guide passage are taken out, that is, the clerk of the game hall or the like is a pachinko game machine. While the inspection and maintenance work of 1 is performed, the ball stopper 340 is set to the first state when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the operating state, that is, when the clerk of the game hall cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the screw member from being mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

Further, the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached to the game machine frame 3 at a plurality of places by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F as a locking portion, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 are attached. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the screw member N11 to N14 to the gaming machine frame 3 fall out of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they are separated from the gaming machine frame 3, so that the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the ball It is attached at a position below the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201. Therefore, since the screw members N11 to N14 for mounting the ball tank forming portion 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game ball, they are hard to come off from the game machine frame 3 as a flanged screw member, while the ball tank forming portion 201 and the ball tank forming portion 201 and Even if the screw members N11 to N14 that attach the first guide passage forming portion 202 are removed, they fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is a payout device 200. It can be prevented from being mixed in.

Further, among a plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the peripheral edge portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 ) Is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the screw member (number of parts) can be reduced, so that the screw member (for example, the ground wire 226) has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It is possible to prevent the screw member from being mixed into the payout device 200. Instead of the ground wire, it may also be used as a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the gaming machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached. Since 201 can be firmly attached and vibration is less likely to occur, loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game machine frame 3 are screw members having no flange portion F and having a small diameter of the head NH. Even if the screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member from being mixed in the dispensing device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 (B) and 27, a screw member that has fallen is placed rearward in a region below the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game board 2 that can be attached to and detached from the game machine frame 3. Alternatively, the cover body 220 is provided with an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the payout device 200 side with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202. It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the upper wall portion 220H from bouncing and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Further, although not particularly shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and fall onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. By guiding the screw member to flow backward or toward the payout device 200 side, the screw member that has fallen on the upper wall portion 220H is prevented from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, 91A arranged below. Can be prevented.

Further, the cover body 220 is generated from these drive sources by being provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the effect device having a movable body, and the effect control board 12. Although a plurality of heat radiating holes 220B for releasing heat are formed on the upper part of the rear wall portion (see FIG. 6), these heat radiating holes 220B have at least the head even if the male screw portion NS of the screw member can be inserted. It is preferable that the size is such that NH cannot be inserted. Further, since there is a high possibility that the screw member falls from the upper holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiating hole 220B is provided. It is preferable that the upper wall portion 220H is formed at a position that does not correspond to the holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H, or is formed at a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, a rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the effect device having a movable body, the effect control board 12, and the like.

(Modification example 1)
Next, a modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 29. 29A and 29B are a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and FIG. 29 is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guide passage forming portion for forming the guide passage for guiding the game ball of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is extended so as to be inclined downward toward the left side. The first guide passage forming portion 202 has a guide passage forming portion 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface thereof is provided so that the ball stopper 340 projects upward on the upper surface of the left end portion. In the present invention, a mode in which the screw member N moving on the cover portion 334 to the left side is received and can be retained has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover portion of the present modification 1 is not limited to this. Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the lower second guide passage forming portion 204.

By doing so, when the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen on the cover portion 360 move toward the left end portion side, they do not stay on the cover portion 360 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since the screw member N falls directly from the left end portion of the screw member N to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (B), in the case where the recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 360, the third recess 361 in the cover portion 360 is located near the recess 361. 1 The cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flow direction of the game ball in the guide passage forming portion 202.

By doing so, the screw member N and the game ball P that have accumulated in the recess 361 but may move due to the inclination can be retained by restricting the movement by the cable C.

(Explanation of deformation and application)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, as the screw members, the screw members N1 to 6 and N11 to 16 for attaching the mounting member 223, the first passage forming body 203, and the like to the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the pachinko machine. Screw members (not shown) that are attached to other parts of the gaming machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the skeletons that make up the gaming island, and various devices (for example, not shown) that are placed inside the gaming island. , Replenishment device 150, etc.), etc.) have been exemplified for screw members (not shown) for attaching to the skeleton, etc., but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. All screw members such as screw members that have remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason, such as forgetting to install them during on-site maintenance, can be targeted, but at least they are pre-installed in the pachinko game machine 1. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a box-shaped ball tank forming portion 201 having an upper surface opened by the bottom wall portion 203A and the standing wall portion B is applied as a storage portion capable of storing the game medium. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the storage unit can store the game ball, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202 like the ball tank forming portion 201. It does not have to be long, and may have substantially the same or shorter front-rear dimensions as the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open as long as it can receive the game ball supplied from the replenishment device 150.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a payout device 200 capable of paying out a game ball by a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out a game medium has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be a payout device capable of paying out a game ball by a member other than a sprocket.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper surface is opened, and the upper surface is opened by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B as a guide passage forming portion for forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the discharge portion. An example is an example in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 formed in a groove shape is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and its shape, size, and the like can be changed in various ways. The width dimension (front-rear dimension) may be substantially the same as or larger than that of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the game balls may be guided in a plurality of rows so as to be able to flow down.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing the game ball and the first guide passage having the upper surface open and guiding the game ball of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the embodiment in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally molded is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling the members with screw members or the like. In this case, the screw member for assembling the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also the target of the screw member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a screw member can be mixed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not limited to this. A screw member may be mixed from a hole, a notch, or the like formed on the standing wall side of the above. Further, when the screw member can be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, the predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204 or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restriction portion or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispensing device 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion covering a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed of a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202. It may be formed integrally with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member stays on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Examples of a form in which elongated holes 316A to 316C as holes that can be formed and recessed grooves 326A to 326C and recesses 336 as recesses are applied have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member is not limited to this. A fall control part (fall inhibition part) that can regulate (or hinder) the fall from the cover part, and a movement regulation part (movement obstruction part) that can regulate (or hinder) the movement of the screw member on the cover part. Alternatively, it may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to be able to fall. As a means capable of regulating or hindering the drop or movement, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adsorbing the screw member, and the like may be used.

That is, the predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is the fall of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202. It suffices as long as it can make it difficult to fall as well as the one that makes it impossible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific restriction units are provided in the first guide passage forming unit 202 and are used as specific restriction units for restricting the movement of the screw member dropped on the first guide passage forming unit 202 to the dispensing device 200. Although the embodiment in which the holes 271A to 271H are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200 side is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement control unit (movement inhibition unit) capable of (inhibition). As a means capable of restricting or hindering the movement to the payout device 200 side, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adsorbing the screw member, and the like. These may be provided at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, a corner portion between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which is not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restriction unit provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200 is the screw member payout device 200. If the movement to the side can be restricted, not only the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 cannot be moved to the payout device 200 side, but also the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (regulated, hindered) by the specific limiting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the ball is clogged because the flow of the game ball is also restricted by the screw member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage. When the ball is clogged, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the clerk of the game hall opens the frame 3 for the game machine to form the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage on the back surface. There is a high possibility that the state of the game ball in the unit 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member does not move to the payout device 200 but stays in the first guide passage forming portion 202, it becomes easy for the store clerk or the like to identify that the cause of the ball clogging was the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the plurality of holes 271A to 271H all have a size capable of dropping the screw member is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A are not limited thereto. As long as at least two or more holes of ~ 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes need not be able to drop the screw member. Further, the shapes and sizes of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary, and are not limited to the above-mentioned forms and can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 are applied as the first substrate to be mounted below the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is limited thereto. Other substrates such as a relay substrate may also be targeted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate mounted at a position above the first guide passage forming portion 202 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , Other substrates such as a relay substrate may be targeted as the second substrate.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board exemplify a form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are housed are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be directly attached to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without passing through the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 as the first substrate, the substrate cases 11A and 12A in which the respective substrates are housed are the screw members N20 and N21, that is, the screw members are used. The terminal board 210, which is mounted on the game board 2 by the mounting method and serves as the second board, uses a locking means including a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members, that is, Although the embodiment of mounting on the board mounting frame 211 by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and a locking means using a latch member or the like, a caulking pin or the like is used. It may include a mounting means, a bonding means using an adhesive or the like, and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 is restricted from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. A form in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied has been illustrated as a special limiting portion for forming the screw member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member has a first guide passage forming portion 202. A drop control section (fall blocker) that can regulate (or hinder) the fall of the screw member, and a movement control section (movement blocker) that can regulate (or block) the movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming section 202. , It may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to be able to fall. As a means capable of restricting or hindering the fall or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a screw member can be adhered. It may be an adhesive portion or the like.

That is, the special restriction portion for restricting the fall of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the one that prevents the screw member from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also Anything that can make it difficult to fall will do. For example, a convex portion as a drop restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion), a concave portion or a hole portion as a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion), or the like may be provided at a predetermined position such as the upper wall portion 225A.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 provided with the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 and the like as the special limiting portion is located near the standing wall portion 203B on the front side. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least between the mounted portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion, the present invention is not necessarily provided at a position near the standing wall portion 203B. For example, it may be provided between the attached portion of the screw member and the guide passage forming portion at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first is a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334 in the cover portion 334. An embodiment in which a ball-stopping member 340 that can be changed is applied to a first state in which the game ball of the guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down has been illustrated. The movement of the screw member is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member is restricted even if the member is provided on the payout device 200 side (inclination lower side) in the inclination direction of the cover portion 334 even if it does not have the ball fixing function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, a wiring retainer, or the like that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball-stopping member 340 as a specific portion is provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, the specific portion may be provided at the end of the cover portion 314,324 on the payout device 200 side as long as it is provided at the end of the cover portion on the payout device 200 side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the ball-stopping member 340 as the specific portion is composed of a member separate from the cover portion 334 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific portion (ball stopper) may be integrally formed on a part of the members constituting the cover portion 334.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a diameter larger than that of the head NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head NH. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or a head. It also includes a rotating stopper and an adhesive for the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer). Further, the screw member is not limited to a member that can be attached by a tool such as a screwdriver, but may be a thumbscrew, and includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that is detached from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion is attached to the game machine frame 3 at a plurality of places by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F as a locking portion to form a ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 even if they are separated from the game machine frame 3. , A mode in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the ball tank forming portion 201 are attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guide passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, the position is shifted in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If it is attached to a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling directly onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A) or the like. May be good.

Further, the predetermined limiting portion, the specific limiting portion, the special limiting portion, and the specific portion in the above embodiment are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but also pachinko games such as a game island. Although the embodiment of restricting or restricting (inhibiting) the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is attached to at least the pachinko gaming machine 1. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200. (Inhibition) It is preferable that it is formed in a possible size and morphology.

(Feature unit 053SG)
Next, a mode for carrying out the game machine in the feature unit 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The game machine in the feature unit 053SG is a pachinko game machine installed in a game hall or the like, a slot machine, or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. 30-1, a game control microcomputer for controlling the game is mounted. It is equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can be applied, the main board 11 of the above embodiment can be applied to the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied to the effect control board. Is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting the input status according to the progress of the game are connected to the game control board. Input parts include, for example, a detection switch that detects an operation by a player, a detection switch that detects the passage of a game medium such as a game ball or a medal, a sensor that identifies a movable object used in a game such as a reel, and a player. It is a detection switch used for various settings such as the advantage of the reel, and a detection switch for detecting the opening of a door or an abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is equipped with an input circuit for detecting input signals from these input components, and the detection status of the input signal from the input components by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and is used to control the game by the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, a plurality of output components such as a display, an LED, a motor, and a solenoid that perform output control according to the progress of the game are connected to the game control board. The output parts are, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the game machine, a display that instructs the player on the operation mode, and a value owned by the player. A display that displays the game status, an LED that indicates the game status, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor that operates a movable part used for a game such as a reel or a variable winning device, a solenoid, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer controls the output components according to the progress of the game by transmitting the output data to the output circuit.

Further, the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and the input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The output data of is transmitted via a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus, and the shared data bus is used. The input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus, but some output circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus and are shared. The output data may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without going through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to the external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the game machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board included in the game machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. The game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals provided by the electronic components are soldered. In the following, electronic components are mounted. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which electronic components are not mounted and the terminals of the electronic components are soldered is called a soldered surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing a mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing a solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board is a rectangular printed circuit board composed of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has insulating properties. Consists of. Further, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes penetrating the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are composed of conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of the above-mentioned wiring patterns are formed. Further, in the region where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board is not formed, an insulating region made of an insulator and a conductor are formed, and a ground region forming a ground is formed. The ground region is a betta land formed over almost the entire area other than the region where the wiring pattern and the insulating region are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 30-2, more wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction, while the solder surface is arranged as shown in FIG. 30-3. There are more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are aggregated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are aggregated on the solder surface, and when the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction intersect. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-3, since many wiring patterns arranged on the solder surface extend in the same lateral direction as the long side, the distance of the wiring pattern is longer than that of the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, the electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the soldering surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern arranged on the soldering surface is hindered by the electronic components. Is avoided.

Further, when the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface is branched, one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through hole. Branching is performed without bypassing one wiring pattern or crossing one wiring pattern and the other wiring pattern at the branch destination on the same surface.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing a mounting surface in a state where the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the above-mentioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include an electronic component having one or more rows of terminals consisting of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components including these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As described above, on the mounting surface, the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction is large, and the electronic components provided with the terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to connect to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction as it is without changing the direction of the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction.

Further, among the electronic components including the terminal train, the input circuit and the output circuit are formed in a rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 30-4, and a concave notch is provided on one side on the short side, and the surface thereof is provided with a concave notch. The model number is printed, and the orientation of the component can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. Then, as shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side and the model number is printed in the direction from left to right in FIG. 30-4, while the output circuit is arranged. , In Fig. 30-4, the notch is arranged to the right and the printing direction of the model number is from right to left, and these electronic components are arranged in the input circuit depending on the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. It is possible to identify whether it is an output circuit or an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing a configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-6 is a diagram from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the branched wiring pattern.

As described above, the game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. .. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns formed on the solder surface extending in the lateral direction, and as shown in FIG. 30-5, the game control board of the game control board. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from the through hole to which the terminal of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side is connected. As shown in FIG. 30-6, the data bus and the electronic components such as the input circuit and the output circuit are branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole, and the wiring pattern is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction. Connected by.

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the lateral direction via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the lateral direction. It is connected to the data bus on the surface, branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at the position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer and the electronic components separated in the lateral direction can be efficiently connected. Further, since the wiring pattern constituting the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, it is not easily affected by the noise from the electronic components on the data bus, and the data bus and the electronic components are through. Since they are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from electronic components during this period is not easily affected.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring patterns extending in the lateral direction constituting the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but are divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the lateral direction. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is an antenna whose resonance is maximized according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock) / 2). Therefore, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus has an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, and it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length is halved of the antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, it may be reflected on the surface of the substrate and strong resonance may occur, so the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) are formed to have a length that is not 1/2 of the antenna length that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock, and strong resonance occurs due to reflection on the surface of the substrate. It is also prevented from emitting radio waves.

Further, the bus clock differs depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be mounted, but the lengths (L1 to L8) of each divided wiring pattern depend on the bus clock which is the maximum frequency expected among them. It is formed so as to be shorter than the antenna length at which the resonance is maximized, and not to be half the antenna length at which the resonance is maximized according to the bus clock at the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock lower than the expected maximum frequency, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the plurality of lateral wiring patterns constituting the data bus are diagonally right or diagonally left, that is, the direction of the plurality of lateral wiring patterns. They are connected across wiring patterns that extend in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the diagonal right direction or the diagonal left direction, which are divided into a plurality of parts, are connected by being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-5, it is mounted through a through hole (A to F shown in FIGS. 30-5) provided on the diagonal wiring pattern connecting the plurality of lateral wiring patterns. It is designed to branch into a wiring pattern on the surface side (wiring pattern connected to A to F shown in FIGS. 30-6), and is a diagonal wiring pattern that connects a plurality of horizontal wiring patterns divided into each other. The wiring patterns that make up the data bus are branched using.

In the game control board according to the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which the resonance is maximized, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns, and a plurality of wiring patterns are divided into a plurality of wiring patterns. The horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected by the diagonal wiring patterns formed on the same solder surface, but the plurality of horizontal wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface side. As a configuration in which horizontal wiring patterns are connected by a separate wiring pattern, that is, horizontal wiring patterns are alternately formed on a solder surface and a mounting surface so that the length of the horizontal wiring pattern is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. Is also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch at a position where the horizontal wiring pattern switches from the solder surface or the mounting surface to the other surface. With such a configuration, the wiring pattern after branching can be bypassed. , It is possible to branch the wiring patterns constituting the data bus without intersecting on the same plane.

FIG. 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground region formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-8 is a diagram formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area.

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, a ground region is formed over almost the entire area other than the region where the wiring pattern and the insulating region are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board. The ground region formed on the game control board is composed of a first ground region and a second ground region electrically separated by an insulating region. On both the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground region is formed in the region on the left side of the game control board, and the second ground region is formed in the region on the right side of the game control board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-7, wiring patterns for transmitting low voltage (Vcc (+ 5V) in this embodiment) signals such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, and an output circuit are connected. The electronic component (low voltage component) is mounted in the left region where the first ground region is formed, and the ground terminal of the low voltage component is connected to the first ground region. On the other hand, electronic components (high-voltage components) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high-voltage (VLD (+ 24V) in this embodiment) signals, such as drive circuits for operating motors and solenoids, are connected are the first. It is mounted in the region on the right side where the two ground regions are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground region. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended current from flowing back from the high voltage component to the low voltage component through the ground region. Further, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs, they are prevented from interfering with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-9, since a capacitor is provided between the first ground region and the second ground region, the capacitor is used between the first ground region and the second ground region. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, it is possible to prevent current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the first The ground region and the second ground region are electrically separated from each other. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the mounting surface. Since the insulating region that separates the ground region and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap, one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, it is prevented from interfering with each other.

FIG. 30-10 is a diagram showing a configuration of a connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-11 is a diagram showing a connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a figure which shows the state which the game control board in this Example is housed in a board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 for connecting wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the game control board near the lower side of the mounting surface. In the wiring from the game control board, the signal that triggers the lottery, the signal that defines the advantage for the player such as the lottery probability, the signal for shifting to a state where the setting value can be changed, and the setting value for changing the setting value. Wiring that inputs or outputs signals related to the advantage of the game, such as signals and signals that display information that is advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring that inputs the detection signal of the error cancellation operation, backup power supply Wiring as a supply line is included.

As shown in FIGS. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and is not directly connected to FIG. As shown in -11, the connector is connected to a wiring pattern formed on a solder surface, that is, a surface opposite to the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed around the wiring pattern. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print information on the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface is the wiring on the mounting surface through the through hole at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminal. Connected to the pattern. In particular, the through-holes a to h shown in FIGS. 30-10 and 30-11 are through-holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern from the solder surface to the mounting surface by using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and 30-12 (B), the game control board is attached to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, a sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open the substrate case without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case, the structure is such that fraud against the game control board is prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and 30-12 (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 in a state where the game control substrate is housed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the region of the mounting surface of the game control board that is covered by the covering portion of the substrate case, and the wiring pattern is formed while avoiding the region. There is. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7, but the connectors CN1 to CN7 The terminals provided on the above are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite surface, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of connectors CN1 to CN7 can be short-circuited from around the part where connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case. It is designed to prevent fraudulent activities such as disconnection.

Further, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering portion of the substrate case, and the area covered by the covering portion is the wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. None of the wiring patterns including the pattern is formed, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface in the area other than the covering portion. The wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is surely prevented from being short-circuited or broken from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+ 5V) is generated on the power supply board and is connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. Further, Vcc (+ 5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board and connected to the charging capacitor via the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor are connected. The line branched between them is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the electric power is being supplied, Vcc (+ 5V) is supplied as a driving power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+ 5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer. By receiving the supply of the backup power supply VBB, the game control microcomputer holds the data stored in the RAM included in the game control microcomputer. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is supplied from the power supply board outside the game control board, but it may be supplied from the circuit provided in the game control board.

30-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-15 is a diagram formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the said wiring pattern, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface.

As shown in FIGS. 30-14, on the solder surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are used as wiring patterns constituting the power supply line. , Are formed. As shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 are composed of a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB is composed of only the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, as shown in FIGS. 30-14. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is supplied is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside is generated. It is less susceptible to damage and prevents the data stored in the RAM from being damaged by noise.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-15, a beta land is formed on the mounting surface where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the noise is blocked by the beta land formed on the mounting surface, so that the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is not easily affected by the noise. Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is on the mounting surface side as compared with the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. In the corresponding region of the above, the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, particularly the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied from the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In this embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB that supplies backup power is the corresponding area on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 that supply normal power. In the configuration, the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmission. However, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the signal that triggers the lottery. The wiring pattern in which signals related to the interests of the player are transmitted, such as, is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring pattern in which signals not directly related to the player's history, such as signals for controlling output components, are transmitted. It is used for the transmission of the signal formed on the mounting surface side by being formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding region. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern in which signals related to the interests of the player from the wiring pattern are transmitted is suppressed as much as possible.

Further, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern in which the reset signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern in which the operation clock is given to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. Where the wiring pattern in which the signal is transmitted intersects the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side, compared to the wiring pattern in which other signals are transmitted. By making the configuration formed at a position where the number of signals is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern in which a relatively important signal is transmitted from the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side is as much as possible. It can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game-related game parts such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling the effect, a reel unit composed of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the surface of the game control board on the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed, is on the game component side. Installed to be placed. With such a configuration, the influence of noise generated from the game component on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko gaming machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in the game hall, it is often installed so that the back surfaces of the pachinko gaming machines face each other with other gaming devices such as other pachinko gaming machines. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed. It is installed so that it is placed on the device side. With such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other gaming devices on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Action effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (left-right direction) different from the one direction is larger than the ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (left-right direction), and the ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (left-right direction) is the first direction (up and down). It is characterized in that it is larger than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are aggregated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are aggregated on the solder surface in the first direction. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, the design such as bypassing the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a square composed of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed without waste along the shape of the game control board.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that electronic components including a terminal row composed of a plurality of terminals are arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in a second direction (left-right direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (left-right direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment has a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (left and right direction). It has a rectangular shape consisting of, and is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (left-right direction) in which the distance can be long on the solder surface without being hindered by the electronic components.

The game control board of the present embodiment includes a wiring pattern in which the wiring pattern branches from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, and one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface. The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to bypass one wiring pattern of the branch destination or to intersect one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern on the same surface, and the wiring pattern can be preferably used. Can be formed.

(Action effect 2)
The game control board of this embodiment connects a first terminal (terminal of a game control microcomputer) and a second terminal (terminals of an input circuit and an output circuit) separated in a specific direction (left-right direction) to a specific signal (terminals of an input circuit and an output circuit). A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting input data and output data is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction). A specific length (λ / 2) in which the linear wiring pattern that is formed by dividing and extends in a specific direction (left-right direction) is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than. According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by being divided into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction), and a straight line extending in a specific direction (left-right direction). The wiring pattern of each is formed shorter than the specific length (λ / 2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed. ) Can be prevented from becoming an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data), and unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). .. According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

The game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). However, a wiring pattern may be formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) and another wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching to. According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be suitably branched by utilizing between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ / 2). According to such a configuration, the length of the linear wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (left-right direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), and therefore is equal to or less than the maximum frequency. Even if the signal is transmitted, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment has a specific length (λ / 2) in which the linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by having a length that does not become 1/2 (λ / 4). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern of a straight line extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) becomes 1/2 of the specific length (λ / 2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

(Action effect 3)
The game control board of this embodiment has a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+ 24V)). The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal is transmitted is connected, the first electronic component (low voltage component) is connected to the first ground region, and the second electronic component (second electronic component) The high voltage component) is characterized in that it is connected to a first ground region and a second ground region separated by an insulating portion. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second voltage. The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the (VDL (+ 24V)) signal is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended current from flowing back through the ground.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is transmitted is connected to the first ground region. The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the second voltage (VDL (+ 24V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which the current difference flowing through the wiring pattern connected by the first electronic component and the second electronic component is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground region and the second electronic component is It may be configured to be connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion, and with such a configuration, the wiring connected by the first electronic component and the second electronic component. Even when the current difference flowing through the pattern is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground region and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground region, so that an unintended current flows back through the ground. Can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground region and the second ground region. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference is temporarily generated between the first ground region and the second ground region by the capacitor, it is possible to prevent the current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region. ..

In the game control board of this embodiment, a first ground region is formed on one side (left side), a second ground region is formed on the other side (right side) facing one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component) is formed. ) Is mounted in the first ground region, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground region. According to such a configuration, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other even if a potential difference temporarily occurs.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. It is characterized by. According to such a configuration, the insulating property between the first ground region and the second ground region can be improved.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even if a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground region and the first ground region are formed. The insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed in corresponding regions, respectively, and the mounting surface is formed. The non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) of the solder surface and the non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) of the solder surface are also formed in the corresponding regions. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface, it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

(Action effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to a wiring pattern formed on a solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface on the opposite side instead of the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the portion where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is the wiring related to the advantage of the game (the signal for shifting the set value to a state where the set value can be changed, and the set value is changed. It is characterized in that it includes a signal for inputting or outputting a signal for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display (wiring for inputting or outputting). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to the advantage of the game.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) regarding the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portion of the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since it is not formed, by displaying the information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the board case includes a covering portion that covers the area around the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is as follows. It is characterized in that it is formed on a solder surface in a region covered with a covering portion. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is not formed on the mounting surface even in the peripheral portion of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7), so that the connector is formed from the board case. It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the exposed portion of the (connectors CN1 to CN7).

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface by using a through hole for connecting to an electronic component.

(Action effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having a storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface, so that the game control is performed. The microcomputer for game control can hold the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is used as the game control microcomputer. The wiring pattern (VBB) supplied to the computer is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which the electronic parts are not mounted, so that the electronic parts are bypassed. Since it is not necessary to form the wiring pattern and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the game component (liquid crystal display, effect control board for controlling the effect, etc.) side related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise generated from the game component on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (other game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from other game devices on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is solid in the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area where the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is provided on the solder surface. It is characterized by the formation of a ground. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the beta land formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is higher than the wiring pattern (Vcc1 to 3) for supplying another power source. It is characterized in that there are few points that intersect with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side can be prevented as much as possible.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board that controls a game is described, but another board mounted on the game machine, for example, a board that controls an effect. The configuration according to the present invention may be applied to a game medium, a board that controls the addition of game value, a board that relays the boards to each other, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in the second embodiment will be described. Similar to the first embodiment, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, a configuration different from that of the game control board of the first embodiment will be mainly described. ..

FIG. 30-18 is a diagram showing a mounting surface of the game control board in the first embodiment, and FIG. 30-19 is a diagram showing a solder surface of the game control board in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board is a rectangular printed circuit board composed of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating property. Consists of. Further, a plurality of through holes are formed on the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. Further, an insulating region and a ground region are formed in the regions where the wiring patterns of the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are not formed.

Similar to the game control board of the first embodiment, the game control board of the second embodiment also has an input circuit and an output circuit mounted therein. The input circuit and the output circuit are formed in a rectangular shape and have short sides. A concave notch is provided on one side, and a model number is printed on the surface so that the orientation of the component can be specified by the direction of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in the drawing and the model number is printed in the direction from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the right side in the drawing and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to specify whether these electronic components are an input circuit or an output circuit depending on the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. There is.

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing a configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-21 is a diagram from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the branched wiring pattern.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns formed on the solder surface extending in the lateral direction, and as shown in FIG. 30-20, the game control board of the game control board. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from the through hole to which the terminal of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side is connected. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed so as to branch to the mounting surface side through a through hole and extend in the vertical direction. ..

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit separated in the lateral direction via the data bus, first, the data bus on the solder surface where the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the lateral direction. Branch to the mounting surface side wiring pattern that extends vertically toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, and is connected to the input circuit or output circuit. It becomes. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the input circuit and the output circuit separated in the lateral direction. Further, since the wiring pattern constituting the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, it is not easily affected by the noise from the electronic components on the data bus, and further, the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit Is connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through a through hole, so that the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-22, the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit and output circuit connected to the data bus. Therefore, the noise on the data bus is less likely to affect the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-20, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the game control board in the vicinity of the upper side in the drawing, and a data bus is provided. The wiring pattern to be configured is formed in a region closer to the lower side in the drawing of the game control board, that is, a region closer to the other side facing the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. Therefore, the area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits is widely secured between the connectors CN10 to CN17 where signals are input and output and the electronic components outside the game control board and the data bus. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for controlling the game (does not trigger a lottery). Input signals from the first input circuit that detects the input of sensors and switches (detection signals of sensors and switches, etc.) and the second input components that are more important than the first input components (detection signals of sensors and switches that trigger lottery, advantageous Based on the output data from the second input circuit that detects the input of the second input circuit that detects the input of the setting value that defines the degree, the game control microcomputer, etc., the operation of the moving parts such as the solenoid and motor according to the progress of the game. The first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component, and the second output that displays various indicators, LEDs, etc. according to the progress of the game based on the output data from the game control microcomputer. The second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when the game is played for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit that outputs an output signal to a performance indicator that displays performance is mounted.

Of these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, the first output circuit, the second output circuit, and the third output circuit are connected to the data bus, and the input data and the output data are transmitted via the data bus. Is done.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring patterns constituting the data bus connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branch to the mounting surface side through through holes at a plurality of points, and are vertically formed on the mounting surface. It is connected to a wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position N in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the positions O and P in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface, and some wiring patterns are external as they are. It is connected to the output terminal, and the remaining wiring pattern is once connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position S in the figure. Is connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among the input circuits and output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the input circuit has a longer wiring pattern length than the output circuit to the game control microcomputer. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for controlling the game is less likely to be affected by noise or the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, an output signal is output to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus. The first output circuit that outputs the game has a shorter wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the data bus so that it becomes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like and affecting the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is other than the performance indicator. Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that displays according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the bus. For this reason, it is difficult for the content of the performance display to be illegally modified due to the arrangement of illegal parts or the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-21, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder surface side, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure corresponds to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. It is connected to the external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, it is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting to the external device, the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the external output terminal Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each of the wiring patterns connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is simply formed.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder surface side outputs an output signal to the second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. In addition to being connected to the terminals of the two output circuits, the wiring pattern is branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is also connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the external device according to the progress of the game. Well, even with such a configuration, in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to a plurality of output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each of the wiring patterns, the wiring pattern is simply formed.

The second input circuit of the input circuits is not connected to the data bus, and the input data is directly transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is once connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole at the position T in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side. At the position of, it is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole, and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

In this way, the first input circuit that detects the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for controlling the game, is connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus. On the other hand, the second input circuit that detects the input of the input signal from the second input component, which is more important than the first input component, is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is a data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through, the input data based on the important input signal is not affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit, and it is sent to the game control microcomputer. It will be transmitted.

(Action effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is the game control microcomputer. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from It is possible to prevent the data from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. However, the output circuit is an input circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the game control microcomputer. With such a configuration, based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control computer to the game control computer. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the input circuit, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control computer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The output circuit is a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The first output circuit includes a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game is the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the parts, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the movement of the movable part from being affected according to the progress.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit. With such a configuration, the game progresses. The second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays is from the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shortened, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise etc. and affecting the display according to the progress of the game. it can.

Further, like the game control board of the first embodiment, the first ground region on which the low voltage component is mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and the high voltage component is mounted on the right side. When the two ground regions are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the two ground regions and outputs an output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground region because it belongs to the low voltage component. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting it in the region, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground region together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, and it is possible to prevent the second output circuit from being overloaded. it can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. Electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, a data bus is formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus through the through hole is output on the mounting surface according to the progress of the game. It is characterized in that it branches into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for performing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal that outputs an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for performing the output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting to the external device, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns. Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the solder surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be simply formed.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The first input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and the first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer. 2 The second input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the input component to the game control microcomputer, and the first output component and the second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. A first output circuit and a second output circuit that output an output signal are included, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit, and the second output circuit are connected to a game control microcomputer via a data bus. The second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without going through a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is for game control without going through the data bus in which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit. ..

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface on the opposite side to the solder surface on which the data bus is formed through the through hole. It is supposed to be. According to such a configuration, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side). According to such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the board area can be effectively utilized. ..

The game control board of this embodiment is equipped with a performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to other indicators. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display is more up to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display. Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify the display contents due to the placement of unauthorized parts.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the orientations of the components are different. With such a configuration, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily grasped.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of Example 1 has the same effect as that described in Example 1. Further, the modified example exemplified for Example 1 can also be applied to Example 2.

The structure of the game control board in the third embodiment will be described. Similar to Examples 1 and 2, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The game control board in the third embodiment is characterized by the structure of the electronic component and the through hole to be mounted, and here, the structure of the electronic component and the through hole will be described.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in the third embodiment, FIG. 30-23 is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and FIG. 30B is a perspective view of the specific electronic component. , It is a perspective view from below of a specific electronic component.

The specific electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and as shown in FIGS. 30-23 (A) and 30-23 (B), the specific electronic component is fixed to the substrate at the bottom of the specific electronic component. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components, and connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the board and used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components. Is provided. Further, the model number of the specific electronic component is engraved or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connecting terminal is illustrated as a specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component, or may be applied. An electronic component that does not have a fixing terminal but only a connecting terminal may be applied as a specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided on the game control board are usually composed of through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in FIG. 30-24 (A), the through hole is usually subjected to copper plating, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through hole, so that the through hole becomes a mounting surface and a solder surface. It is a through hole that conducts with. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-24 (B), the specific through hole is a through hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through hole is not copper-plated and the through hole is not conductive between the mounting surface and the solder surface. is there.

Normally, when soldering to the through hole from the solder surface side, as shown in FIG. 30-24 (A), the through hole is copper-plated, so that the solder in the through hole reaches the mounting surface. Although it flows up, when soldering to a specific through hole from the solder surface side, as shown in FIG. 30-24 (B), since the through hole is not copper-plated, the inside of the through hole is filled. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 into the specific through hole, inserting the connection terminal into the normal through hole, and soldering from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted into the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side. Therefore, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent problems such as the model number printed or engraved above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by solder because it rises too much toward the mounting surface on which the component is mounted.

In particular, since the model number is hidden by solder, there is a risk that it cannot be found even if the part is replaced illegally. There is a risk that you will not be able to receive it, or you may not be allowed to install it in the game store because you cannot confirm the model number when installing it in the game store, but the terminal with the model number printed or engraved on the top is a specific through hole. By fixing with, such a problem can be prevented.

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for propagating signals and electric power of specific electronic components, a problem occurs even if the electrical connection is weakened when soldering through a specific through hole. Never. On the other hand, since the connection terminal is usually inserted into the through hole and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, the electrical connection can be ensured when the solder reaches the mounting surface.

(Action effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and a wiring pattern is formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A terminal is inserted through a through hole that penetrates the surface and the solder surface, and the through hole and the terminal are fixed by soldering, and a specific through hole is formed in which a specific electronic component is fixed among a plurality of electronic components. The specific through hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct, and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through hole is soldered because the mounting surface and the solder surface do not conduct with each other and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered from the solder surface. At that time, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a defect.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, since it is the terminals for fixing the specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) that are soldered to the specific through holes, the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, there is no problem even if the electrical connection is weakened.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered to the specific through holes. A terminal (connection terminal) that propagates the signal or power of the component may be inserted and soldered. According to such a configuration, the solder rises too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of terminals that propagate signals and power of specific electronic components with other terminals.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or engraved) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and hiding the model number of the specific electronic component.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configurations as those of Examples 1 and 2 have the same effects as those described in Examples 1 and 2. Further, the modifications illustrated with reference to Examples 1 and 2 can also be applied to Example 3.

(Invention of Feature 053SG)
As described above, the feature unit 053SG includes the inventions shown below. That is, conventionally, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, for example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine is generally provided with a substrate on which an electronic device is mounted. A board of this type has been proposed in which data is input / output between a control means such as a CPU and another electronic device using a single data bus. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of the wiring pattern. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine in which the wiring pattern of the substrate is preferably formed, the game machine of (1) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a game machine that can play games
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the output circuit.
According to this feature, an input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the output circuit that outputs the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (2) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1).
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface) and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2).
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (solder surface) on which the data bus is formed through a through hole. It is a feature.
According to this feature, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3).
On the board (game control board), connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted in the vicinity of one side (upper side), and the data bus is the board (game). The control board) is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) facing the one side.
According to this feature, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, so that the board area can be effectively used.

The gaming machine of (5) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4).
A performance indicator that displays the performance of the game machine is mounted on the board (game control board).
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance display is more like the control means (game control) than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another display. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the (microcomputer) is shortened.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to other indicators, which is an illegal component. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally modify the display contents due to the arrangement of the above.

The gaming machine of (6) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5).
The input circuit and the output circuit are characterized in that they are mounted on the substrate so that the orientations of the components are different.
According to this feature, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine of (7) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6).
The data bus is characterized in that it is connected to a noise reduction circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, the influence of noise on the control means can be prevented.

The game machine of (8) of the feature part 053SG is
It is a game machine that can play games
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit outputs to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A second electronic component (second electronic component) that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal and the control means (microcomputer for game control). Includes a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to (two output components).
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the second output circuit (second output circuit). It is characterized by being done.
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game becomes the second electronic component that displays according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is affected by noise etc. and can move according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the operation of the part from being affected.

The gaming machine of (9) of the feature part 053SG is
It is a game machine that can play games
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
In the board (game control board), electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and the data bus is connected through a through hole. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern of the first surface (mounting surface) on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game. It is characterized by branching into a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the first surface side is used to output according to the progress of the game by utilizing the wiring pattern of the first surface connected from the data bus formed on the second surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, it is formed on the second surface to branch into each of the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern. Since it is not necessary to branch from the generated data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be simply formed.

The gaming machine of (10) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a game machine that can play games
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer). Input data based on input signals from the circuit (first input circuit) and the second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is used for the control means (game control). A third electronic component (first output component, second output) based on the second input circuit (second input circuit) transmitted to the (microcomputer) and the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). Includes an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component).
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus.
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the control means (microcomputer for game control) without going through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without going through the data bus to which the input data from another input circuit and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (11) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a game machine that can play games
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the input circuit.
According to this feature, an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the input circuit transmitted to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (12) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a game machine that can play games
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit outputs to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A second electronic component (second electronic component) that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal and the control means (microcomputer for game control). Includes a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to (two output components).
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the first output circuit (first output circuit). It is characterized by being done.
According to this feature, the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that displays according to the progress of the game becomes the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the first output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is affected by noise etc. and is displayed according to the progress of the game. Can be prevented from affecting the.

In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is inside the game machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine is applied as an example of the game machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least one that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The game machine of the present invention is also a storage unit (for example, a ball tank) that is a game machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) and can store a game medium (for example, a game ball P). The forming section 201), the payout section capable of paying out the game medium (for example, the payout device 200), and the guide passage (for example, the first) in which the upper surface is opened to guide the game medium of the storage section to the payout section. The guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the second guide passage forming portion 204) forming the first guide passage and the second guide passage) and a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion are covered. (For example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330), and a screw member (for example, a screw) that has fallen onto the cover portion is provided on the cover portion. Predetermined limiting portions (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) are provided to limit the falling of the members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 into the guide passage forming portion (FIG. 22). , FIG. 24), the guide passage forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guidance passage forming portion to the payout portion. (See FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), the predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) retains the game medium that has fallen on the cover portion. Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R and voice synthesis IC079SG132 mounted on the voice control board 13), which are provided so as to be able to fall from the cover portion without causing the sound to be dropped, and which can output a directing sound. The data ROM 079SG133, the amplification circuit 079SG134), the display means capable of displaying the effect moving image (for example, the image display device 5), and the effect image of the character are displayed on the display means, and the effect moving image of the character is displayed. The effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect) for outputting the effect sound by the sound output means is provided, and the effect executing means is the first period of the predetermined effect. In the display means, a production moving image in which the progress speed of the production is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half of each of the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect) In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving speed at which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. As shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the moving speed of each reach effect video is V2. With respect to the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound is the same in both the first period and the second period. It can be output by the sound output means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect is executed. During the period and the latter half of the execution period, a game machine (a part in which BGM, a production sound, etc. are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at V4, which is a normal reproduction speed) can be mentioned.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion. Further, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined limiting portion and the state in which the screw member can always stay can be maintained, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. can do. In addition, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed related to the production sound corresponding to the predetermined production does not change between the first period and the second period. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent giving a feeling of strangeness.

That is, by preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to break down, and also to prevent the speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect from changing. As a result, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to give a sense of discomfort to the player. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that does not easily break down when installed in a game hall and does not give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, as an example of a game machine in which the screw member can be prevented from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming part and the payout part, and the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable in the production, a game machine capable of playing a game ( For example, it is a pachinko game machine 1) and is a sound output means capable of outputting a production sound (for example, a sound synthesis IC 079SG132, a voice data ROM 079SG133, an amplification circuit 079SG134 mounted on a speaker 8L, 8R and a voice control board 13). A display means capable of displaying the effect moving image (for example, the image display device 5) and the sound output means for displaying the effect moving image of the character on the display means and displaying the effect moving image of the character. An effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect) to be output is provided, and the effect executing means has a progress speed of the effect in the first period of the predetermined effect. The first-speed effect moving image can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth. During the first half execution period of each of the reach effects, the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1), in the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period. It is possible to display the effect moving image, which is the second speed in which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed, on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach effect. , The portion in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the latter half execution period of each of the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect), the predetermined effect With respect to the effect sound corresponding to, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIGS. 40-19 to FIG. As shown in 40-25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the speakers 8L, 8R to BGM (Part where the production sound and the like are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed) A game machine can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these game machines will be described as another form example.

[form]
The game machine of form A1
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
Sound output means capable of outputting the production sound (for example, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the voice data ROM 079SG133, and the amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13).
A display means capable of displaying a production video (for example, an image display device 5) and
An effect executing means (for example, a reach effect) capable of displaying a character's effect moving image on the display means and outputting an effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the character's effect moving image (for example, reach effect). CPU120 for production control) and
With
The effect executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving speed at which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40). As shown in -19 to 40-25, during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the moving image of each reach effect becomes the progress speed V2. The part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40-). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 40-25, the speakers 8L and 8R during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively. The part where BGM, production sound, etc. are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the production sound corresponding to the predetermined production does not change between the first period and the second period. , It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

The gaming machine of the form A2 is the gaming machine according to the form A1.
The sound output means is amplified by a reproduction circuit for reproducing sound (for example, IC079SG132 for sound synthesis), an amplifier circuit for amplifying the sound reproduced by the reproduction circuit (for example, an amplifier circuit 079SG134), and the amplification circuit. It is characterized by including a speaker (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) that outputs a sound.
According to this feature, it is possible to output a highly reproducible production sound from the speaker at an appropriate volume.

The gaming machine of the form A3 is the gaming machine according to the form A1 or the form A2.
The effect executing means can output the speed related to the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect by the sound output means at the same speed as the first period in the predetermined period in the second period, and is predetermined in the second period. In a specific period after the period, the sound output means can output at a speed different from that of the first period (for example, as shown in the modified example 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the first In the first half of each reach production of 3 reach production and 4 reach production, the speaker is the same as the first half of each reach production of 1 reach production, 2nd reach production, 3rd reach production, and 4th reach production. While the production sound is output from 8L and 8R at the playback speed V4, the second half of each reach production of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production is V4 in the latter half of the execution period. (For example, the part that outputs the production sound at a playback speed different from that of V4 (for example, V5 slower than the playback speed V4))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, in the second period in which the effect video is displayed at the second speed, the speed related to the effect sound can be made different for a specific period, so that the effect of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect can be improved. Therefore, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form A4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A3.
The production sound corresponding to the predetermined production includes music and sound effects (for example, a portion capable of outputting BGM (music) and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R).
According to this feature, the game entertainment can be improved by the directing sound including the music and the sound effect.

The gaming machine of the form A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A4.
A light emitting means (for example, a game effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light during at least the first period and the second period and capable of changing the light emitting mode is provided.
The effect executing means can change the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in the second period in a period shorter than that of the first period (for example, FIGS. 40-20, 40-21, 40-24, FIG. As shown in 40-25, during the second half execution period of the second reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect, each execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth Reach production first half The part where the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a cycle shorter than the execution period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of the effect of the second period can be improved by shortening (faster) the period of change of the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in the second period when the progress rate of the effect is slow.

The gaming machine of the form A6 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A5.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing a game.
Sound output means capable of outputting the production sound (for example, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the voice data ROM 079SG133, and the amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13).
As a display area on which the production moving image can be displayed, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 40-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example). , Second display area 079SG005Sa), display means including (for example, image display device 5), and
In the first display area, a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect) in which the character's effect moving image is displayed and the effect sound is output by the sound output means along with the display of the character's effect image, and in the second display area. An information effect for operating the information display related to the variable display (for example, the rotation display of the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 40-2 (B), and FIG. 40- An effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in 2 (C), and
With
The effect executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving speed at which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40). As shown in -19 to 40-25, during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the moving image of each reach effect becomes the progress speed V2. The part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40-). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 40-25, the speakers 8L and 8R during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively. The part where BGM, production sound, etc. are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed),
Regarding the information effect, it is possible to execute the information effect to operate the information display at the same operating speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIGS. 40-19 to 40-). As shown in 25, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the rotation display of the hold display is rotated at the rotation speed V3. , The part that displays the movement display of the telop at the movement speed V3)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect video of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, but the operation speed of the information display and the speed related to the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect are the first period and the second period. Since it does not change with the period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of the form A7 is the gaming machine according to the form A6.
The total area of the first display area is larger than the total area of the second display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-2 (A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is the second display area 079SG005Sa. Area larger than the combined area of the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the predetermined effect as compared with the information effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form A8 is the gaming machine according to the form A6 or the form A7.
The effect executing means can execute an information effect that always operates the information display at the same operating speed during at least a period during variable display other than the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40). As shown in FIGS. -18 to 40-25, in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, the rotation display of the hold display is executed at the rotation speed V3 during the period other than the reach effect, and the telop is displayed. In the display area 079SG005T, the movement display of the telop is executed at the movement speed V3)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the operation speed of the information display does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information effect.

The gaming machine of the form A9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A6 to A8.
The information effect is a movement display effect (for example, in the telop display area 079SG005T, a movement display of a message according to a game state) in which an information display suggesting a state related to the effect in the variable display during execution is sequentially moved and displayed in the second display area. Includes the part that executes
The effect executing means can execute a movement display effect of moving and displaying the information display so that at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player (for example, FIG. 40-2 (C)). As shown, the characters included in the message in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time, are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T and move to the left again. The part that is moved to the right from
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, at least a part of the information display is always visible to the player, so that the player can easily recognize that the movement display effect is being executed.

The gaming machine of the form A10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A9.
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
Sound output means capable of outputting the production sound For example, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the voice data ROM 079SG133, and the amplifier circuit 079SG134) mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13.
A display means capable of displaying a production video (for example, an image display device 5) and
A privilege giving means (for example, CPU103) for giving a privilege (for example, a jackpot game state),
A predetermined effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect movie of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect video of the character. ), And an effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that is different from the jackpot notification effect) that notifies whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect ,
With
The effect executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving speed at which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40). As shown in -19 to 40-25, during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the moving image of each reach effect becomes the progress speed V2. The part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40-). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 40-25, the speakers 8L and 8R during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively. The part where BGM, production sound, etc. are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed),
Within the second period, it is possible to execute an effect effect that is different from the predetermined effect and enhances the effect of the predetermined effect (for example, FIGS. 40-20, 40-21, and FIG. As shown in 40-28, the part that executes the effect effect of displaying the concentrated line on the image display device 5 during the second half execution period of the second reach effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed related to the production sound corresponding to the predetermined production does not change between the first period and the second period. , It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort, and further, the effect effect of the second period is enhanced, and the player recognizes that the notification effect is executed after the second period ends. It can be done easily.

The gaming machine of the form A11 is the gaming machine according to the form A10.
The effect executing means is
The effect effect is shown in a plurality of modes (for example, a mode in which concentrated lines shown in FIGS. 40-28 (C) are displayed) and a mode in which the concentration line shown in FIG. 40-28 (D) is displayed, in which the effect degree of enhancing the effect of the predetermined effect is different. As shown in FIG. 40-28 (C), the number of concentrated lines displayed is larger).
It is possible to execute the effect effect in such a manner that the effect of enhancing the effect effect is gradually increased from the start point to the end point of the second period (for example, FIGS. 40-28 (C) and 40-28 (for example). As shown in D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle production progresses)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the mode of the effect effect changes to a mode in which the degree of effect for enhancing the effect of the predetermined effect is gradually increased. Therefore, the game is played by the effect effect that the notification effect is executed after the second period ends. It can be easier for people to recognize.

The gaming machine of the form A12 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A11.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing a game.
Sound output means capable of outputting the production sound (for example, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the voice data ROM 079SG133, and the amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13).
As a display area on which the production moving image can be displayed, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 40-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example). , Second display area 079SG005Sa), display means including (for example, image display device 5), and
A privilege giving means (for example, CPU103) for giving a privilege (for example, a jackpot game state),
A predetermined effect (for example, suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect movie of the character in the first display area and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect movie of the character). Reach effect), a notification effect that notifies whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, a notification effect that is different from the jackpot notification effect), and specific information related to variable display in the second display area. (For example, in the rotation display of the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 40-2 (B), and in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 40-2 (C). An effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a telop movement display) and
With
The effect executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first The first half of each of the 1st reach effect, the 2nd reach effect, the 3rd reach effect, and the 4th reach effect The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the execution period),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect moving image having a second speed in which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example,). As shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the moving speed of each reach effect during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40-). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 40-25, the speakers 8L and 8R during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively. The part where BGM, production sound, etc. are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed),
The notification effect can be executed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, FIGS. 40-26 (G), 40-29 (E), 40-30 (D), FIG. As shown in 40-31 (G) and 40-35 (C), when the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of big hits as a big hit notification effect, the big hits in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. The part that displays the image of the notification effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed related to the production sound corresponding to the predetermined production does not change between the first period and the second period. , It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort, and further, by executing the notification effect in a wide display area that combines the first display area and the second display area, the privilege is given. It can be easily recognized by the player.

The form A13 is the gaming machine according to the form A12.
The effect executing means is
A first display (for example, a hold display) that operates in the second display area and a second display (for example, a first hold storage display area 079SG005D and a second hold storage display area 079SG005U) that does not operate in the second display area. ) Can be displayed in the specific information production.
The notification effect can be executed in the second display area in which the first display and the second display are erased (for example, FIGS. 40-26 (G), 40-29 (E), 40-30). As shown in FIGS. 40-31 (G) and 40-35 (C), when the jackpot notification effect is executed, the hold display, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U and telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the notification effect is executed in the second display area in which not only the first display that operates but also the second display that does not operate is erased, so that the visibility of the notification effect in the second display area is further enhanced. be able to.

The gaming machine of the form A14 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A13.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing a game.
Sound output means capable of outputting the production sound (for example, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the voice data ROM 079SG133, and the amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13).
As a display area capable of displaying the effect moving image, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F), a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example, the second display area 079SG005Sa), and Display means including (for example, image display device 5) and
A privilege granting means (for example, CPU103) for granting a privilege (for example, a jackpot game state),
A predetermined effect (for example, suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect movie of the character in the first display area and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect movie of the character). Reach effect), a notification effect that notifies whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, a notification effect that is different from the jackpot notification effect), and an information effect related to variable display in the second display area. (For example, the rotation display of the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U shown in FIG. 40-2 (B), and the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 40-2 (C). (For example, the effect control CPU 120) and the effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the movement display of
With
The display means can change the visibility of the first display area and the second display area (for example, as shown in the modified example 079SG-2, in addition to the first display area 079SG005F, the second display Area 079SG005Sa and third display area 079SG005Sb that can reduce the visibility),
The effect executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first The first half of each of the 1st reach effect, the 2nd reach effect, the 3rd reach effect, and the 4th reach effect The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the execution period),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect moving image having a second speed in which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example,). As shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the moving speed of each reach effect during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40-). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 40-25, the speakers 8L and 8R during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively. The part where BGM, production sound, etc. are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed),
In the pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, the visibility of the first display area changes, but the visibility of the second display area does not change (for example, variant 079SG). As shown in FIGS. 40-36 and 40-37 as -2, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change. part)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed related to the production sound corresponding to the predetermined production does not change between the first period and the second period. , It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort, and further, the visibility of the first display area changes during the pre-notification period, so that the player can easily recognize the timing at which the notification effect is executed. It is also possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information effect because the visibility of the second display area does not change.

The form A15 is the gaming machine according to the form A14.
The display means is a means capable of generating an image to be displayed, and is derived from a first drawing layer (for example, second image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the first display area and the first drawing layer. Is also a higher drawing hierarchy, and an image generation means (for example, display) having a plurality of drawing hierarchies including a second drawing hierarchy (for example, first image data) capable of drawing an image to be displayed in the second display area. Including the control unit 123)
The visibility of the first display area is changed by changing the visibility of the image drawn by the image generation means in the first drawing hierarchy (for example, as shown in the modification 079SG-2, the second image data. The part that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as the image of
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, only the visibility of the first display area can be accurately changed without changing the visibility of the second display area.

The form A16 is the gaming machine according to the form A15.
The image generation means increases the visibility of the image drawn in the first drawing layer from a specific position away from the area corresponding to the second display area in the first drawing layer to the area corresponding to the second display area. (For example, as shown in the modified example 079SG-2, the effect image 079SG005Ea drawn as an image of the second image data is changed from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa. And the part that changes the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the third display area 079SG005Sb)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the change in visibility of the first drawing layer changes from a specific position toward the area corresponding to the second display area over a predetermined period, and thus corresponds to the second display area. The visibility of the area can be made difficult to change.

The form A17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A14 to A16.
A motion detecting means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's motion is provided.
The effect executing means is
The notification effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detecting means (for example, the game is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, or the jackpot game. The part that can notify that the state is not controlled),
It is possible to execute an operation promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion effect) that promotes the movement of the player by displaying an operation promotion image for executing the notification effect in the first display area.
The visibility of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is reduced, but the visibility of the operation promoting effect is not reduced (for example, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the first image is reduced. The part where the visibility of the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as data images does not decrease)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the motion promoting effect stand out with respect to the predetermined effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to perform the motion.

The form A18 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A17.
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display of identification information and capable of playing a game.
Sound output means capable of outputting the production sound (for example, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the voice data ROM 079SG133, and the amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13).
As a display area on which the production moving image can be displayed, a first display area (for example, the first display area 079SG005F shown in FIG. 40-2 (A)) and a second display area closer to the periphery than the first display area (for example). , Second display area 079SG005Sa), display means including (for example, image display device 5), and
A privilege giving means (for example, CPU103) for giving a privilege (for example, a jackpot game state),
A predetermined effect (for example, suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect movie of the character in the first display area and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect movie of the character). An information effect (for example, FIG. 40-) that operates a reach effect), a notification effect that notifies whether or not a privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed, and an information display related to the variable display in the second display area. Execute the rotation display of the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U shown in 2 (B), and the movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 40-2 (C). Possible effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) and
With
The effect executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first The first half of each of the 1st reach effect, the 2nd reach effect, the 3rd reach effect, and the 4th reach effect The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the execution period),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, an effect moving image having a second speed in which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed in the first display area (for example,). As shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the moving speed of each reach effect during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. The part displayed on the image display device 5 in V2),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40-). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 40-25, the speakers 8L and 8R during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively. The part where BGM, production sound, etc. are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed),
In the pre-notification period from the end of the predetermined effect to the execution of the notification effect, the pre-notification effect that displays a specific still image corresponding to the progress stop of the predetermined effect executed in the first display area. (For example, still image display effect) can be executed,
The operation of the information display in the second display area continues even in the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-20 and 40-21, the first hold is also performed during the still image display effect execution period. Rotational display of hold display in storage display area 079SG005D and second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and telop movement display in telop display area 079SG005T shown in FIG. 40-2 (C))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed related to the production sound corresponding to the predetermined production does not change between the first period and the second period. , It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort, and the player recognizes that the notification effect is executed by displaying the specific still image in the first display area in the period before the notification. Since the information display operation in the second display area is continued, it is possible to prevent the information effect from becoming difficult to recognize due to the information display operation being stopped.

The form A19 is the gaming machine according to the form A18.
The specific still image is an image in which the progress is stopped and the color of the still image of the predetermined effect is changed (for example, FIGS. 40-16 and 40-29 (A) to 40-29 (B). As shown, the part where the color of the still image is inverted by executing the still image display effect in the pattern SG-2)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the specific still image displayed in the first display area is different in color from the still image of the predetermined effect, so that the player can more easily recognize that the notification effect is executed.

The form A20 is the gaming machine according to the form A19.
The color of the information effect image displayed in the second display area does not change during the pre-notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-29 (B), the still image display effect is the pattern SG-. By executing in 2, the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, but it is displayed in the hold display or telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and in the third display area 079SG005Sb. The part where the color of the 4th pattern is not inverted)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the information effect when the pre-notification effect is executed (the color of the image of the information effect does not change, so the color has changed. It can be easily recognized as a specific still image).

The form A21 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A20.
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
Sound output means capable of outputting the production sound (for example, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the voice data ROM 079SG133, and the amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13).
A display means capable of displaying a production video (for example, an image display device 5),
A privilege giving means (for example, CPU103) for giving a privilege (for example, a jackpot game state),
A predetermined effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect movie of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect video of the character. ), An effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that is different from the jackpot notification effect) that notifies whether or not a privilege is given after the execution of the predetermined effect.
With
The predetermined effect includes a first section (for example, a first reach effect and a third reach effect) and a second section after the first section (for example, a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect).
The first section and the second section each have a first period (for example, a first reach effect first half execution period, a second reach effect first half execution period, a third reach effect first half execution period, and a fourth reach, respectively. The first half of the production period) and the second period after the first period (for example, the second half of the reach production, the second half of the second reach, the second half of the reach, the fourth Including (reach production second half execution period)
The effect executing means is
In the first period, the production moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach effect, the first The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the 2 reach effect, the 3rd reach effect, and the 4th reach effect),
In the second period, the production moving image having a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25). , 1st reach effect, 2nd reach effect, 3rd reach effect, 4th reach effect The part where the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2 during the execution period. ),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40-). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 40-25, the speakers 8L and 8R during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively. The part where BGM, production sound, etc. are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed),
The variable display of the super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 40-20 and 40-21, the variable display of the super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 40-20 and 40-21, and FIGS. The variable display of the super reach β3 shown in 40-25 and the second pattern (for example, the super reach shown in FIGS. 40-18 and 40-19) which ends without shifting to the second section after the execution of the first section. It is characterized in that it can be executed by variable display of α1 and super reach α2 and variable display of super reach β1 and super reach β2 shown in FIGS. 40-22 and 40-23).
According to this feature, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed related to the production sound corresponding to the predetermined production does not change between the first period and the second period. , It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and further, the predetermined effect is executed at the second speed in the first section and shifts to the second section or the predetermined effect is performed without shifting to the second section. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the bonus is given by executing the predetermined effect at the second speed in the second section, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Form A22 is the gaming machine according to Form A21.
The effect executing means is
An end suggestion effect that suggests that the predetermined effect ends in the first section without shifting to the second section (for example, a ally character in the first reach effect second half execution period or the third reach effect second half execution period). Can be defeated by enemy characters)
The end suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when shifting from the first section to the second section can be executed at the same progress speed (for example, FIGS. 40-19, 40-20, 40-21). , 40-23, 40-24, and 40-25 show that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character during the first half-execution period of the first reach effect and the second half execution period of the third reach effect. The part where the second half of the reach effect or the second half of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, an effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect can be displayed on the display means, and the first In the second notification period after the first notification period, a production moving image having a fourth speed slower than the third speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 40-18, 40-20, 40). -22, FIGS. 40-24, 40-25 and 40-26 (E) to 40-26 (G), 40-29 (C) to 40-29 (E), 40-30 (Fig. 40-30). B) to 40-30 (D), 40-31 (E) to 40-31 (G), 40-35 (A) to 40-35 (C) of the ally character. The part that displays the video when the enemy character collapses due to the hit of the attack at the progress speed V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not given in the notification effect, it is possible to display the effect video of the third speed without displaying the effect video of the fourth speed on the display means in the second notification period. (For example, FIGS. 40-19, 40-21, 40-23, 40-25 and 40-27 (E) to 40-27 (G), 40-30 (F) to 40. As shown in -30 (H), FIGS. 40-32 (E) to 40-32 (G), and 40-35 (D) to 40-35 (F), the moving image of the moving image when the ally character collapses. The part where the display is executed at the progress speed V1)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the progress speed of the predetermined effect when shifting to the second section is the same as the progress speed of the end suggestion effect, the progress speed when shifting to the second section is the progress speed of the end suggestion effect. By making a difference, it is possible to prevent the expectation that the privilege will be granted from being excessively increased, and when it is notified that the privilege will not be granted, the fourth speed production video will not be displayed. Since it is possible to prevent the player's dissatisfaction from becoming excessively high, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the form A23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A22.
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
Sound output means capable of outputting the production sound (for example, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the voice data ROM 079SG133, and the amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13).
A display means capable of displaying a production video (for example, an image display device 5) and
A privilege giving means (for example, CPU103) for giving a privilege (for example, a jackpot game state),
Motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
A predetermined effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect movie of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect video of the character. ), An action promotion effect that encourages the player's movement (for example, an operation promotion effect), and a notification effect that notifies whether or not a privilege is given based on the detection of the player's movement by the motion detection means (for example). , An effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a jackpot notification effect and a missed notification effect
With
The effect executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving speed at which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40). As shown in -19 to 40-25, during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the moving image of each reach effect becomes the progress speed V2. The part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40-). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 40-25, the speakers 8L and 8R during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively. The part where BGM, production sound, etc. are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed),
When the effect moving image of the predetermined effect is being displayed at the second speed in the second period, the operation promotion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-24 and 40-25). 4 Second half of the reach effect The part where the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the reach effect movie is executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution period)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to this feature, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed related to the production sound corresponding to the predetermined production does not change between the first period and the second period. , It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort, and further, since the predetermined effect proceeds at the second speed during the execution of the motion promotion effect during the second period, it is possible to enhance the effect of the predetermined effect. it can.

The gaming machine of the form A24 is the gaming machine according to the form A23.
The motion promotion effect includes an effective detection period notification effect (for example, display of a meter 079SG005M indicating an operation succession period of the push button 31B) for notifying an effective detection period for receiving detection of a player's motion by the motion detection means. ,
When the effective detection period ends, the effect executing means detects the player's motion by the motion detecting means within the valid detection period from a timing after the timing at which the valid detection period ends. The same notification effect as in the case can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-33 (E), 40-34 (E), and 40-35 (A) to 40-35 (F), push. A part that executes the same jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect based on the end of the operation acceptance period of the button 31B or the operation of the push button 31B by the player)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the motion detecting means does not detect the player's motion, the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the valid detection period elapses, so that the motion detecting means detects the player's motion. By not doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the privilege is granted during the valid detection period.

The gaming machine of the form A25 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A24.
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
Sound output means capable of outputting the production sound (for example, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the voice data ROM 079SG133, and the amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13).
A display means capable of displaying a production video (for example, an image display device 5) and
A privilege giving means (for example, CPU103) for giving a privilege (for example, a jackpot game state),
A predetermined effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect movie of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect video of the character. ), An effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that is different from the jackpot notification effect) that notifies whether or not the privilege is given after the predetermined effect is completed.
With
The effect executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving speed at which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40). As shown in -19 to 40-25, during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the moving image of each reach effect becomes the progress speed V2. The part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40-). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 40-25, the speakers 8L and 8R during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively. The part where BGM, production sound, etc. are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed),
When notifying that a privilege is given in the notification effect, an effect moving image in which the progress speed of the effect is the third speed in the first notification period of the notification effect can be displayed on the display means, and the first. In the second notification period after the first notification period, a production moving image having a fourth speed slower than the third speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 40-18, 40-20, 40). -22, FIGS. 40-24 and 40-26 (E) to 40-26 (G), 40-29 (C) to 40-29 (E), 40-30 (B) to 40. As shown in -30 (D), FIGS. 40-31 (E) to 40-31 (G), and 40-35 (A) to 40-35C), the attack of the ally character in the jackpot notification effect. The video of the part where the enemy character hits is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2),
When notifying that the privilege is not given in the notification effect, it is possible to display the effect video of the third speed without displaying the effect video of the fourth speed on the display means in the second notification period. (For example, FIGS. 40-19, 40-21, 40-23, 40-25 and 40-27 (E) to 40-27 (G), 40-30 (F) to 40. As shown in -30 (H), FIGS. 40-32 (E) to 40-32 (G), and 40-35 (D) to 40-35 (F), the moving speed of the moving speed of the missed notification effect is Part displayed in V1)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to this feature, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed related to the production sound corresponding to the predetermined production does not change between the first period and the second period. , It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort, and further, when the grant of the privilege is notified as the notification effect, the effect video with the fourth speed of progress is displayed, so the privilege is given. It is possible to impress the player with the production video of the notification effect.

The gaming machine of the form A26 is the gaming machine according to the form A25.
The effect executing means is a still image display effect (pattern SG-) in which the color of the still image is reversed during the second period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-16) only when the privilege is given. A game machine characterized in that it can execute (2) still image display effect)).
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the special effect is executed.

The gaming machine of the form A27 is the gaming machine of the form A26.
As the privilege, the privilege granting means includes a first privilege (for example, a jackpot gaming state of a non-probability jackpot) and a second privilege (for example, a jackpot gaming state of a probability variation jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege. Can be granted,
The effect executing means can execute a special effect (for example, the revival effect shown in the modified example 079SG-4) for notifying that the privilege is given after once notifying that the privilege is not given in the notification effect. ,
When the special effect is executed during the second period and it is notified that the privilege is given by the notification effect, the second privilege is given (for example, as shown in the modified example 079SG-4). When the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 and the jackpot notification effect is executed, the part controlled to the jackpot game state of the probability variation jackpot),
When the special effect is executed after the special effect is executed during the second period and it is notified that the privilege is not given by the notification effect, the first privilege or the second privilege is given. (For example, as shown in the modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, the disconnection notification effect is once executed, and then the revival effect is executed, the jackpot of the non-probability variable jackpot is executed. There are cases where it is controlled by the game state and cases where it is controlled by the jackpot game state of the probability variation jackpot)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to this feature, after the special effect is executed, the player can pay attention to whether or not the grant of the privilege is notified by the notification effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form A28 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A27.
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
Sound output means capable of outputting the production sound (for example, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the voice data ROM 079SG133, and the amplifier circuit 079SG134 mounted on the speakers 8L, 8R and the voice control board 13).
A display means capable of displaying a production video (for example, an image display device 5) and
A privilege giving means (for example, CPU103) for giving a privilege (for example, a jackpot game state),
Motion detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the player's motion, and
A predetermined effect (for example, reach effect) suggesting that a privilege is given by displaying the effect movie of the character on the display means and outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the effect video of the character. ), A first motion promotion image (for example, operation promotion image 079SG005Ba) and a second motion promotion image different from the first motion promotion image (for example, operation promotion image 079SG005Bb). Whether or not the privilege is given based on the motion promotion effect (for example, operation promotion effect) that displays the image on the display means to encourage the player's movement and the detection of the player's movement by the motion detection means. An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a notification effect that is different from the jackpot notification effect) to be notified, and
With
The effect executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed in which the progress speed of the effect is the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the first reach The part in which the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1 during the first half execution period of each of the effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect),
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving speed at which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means (for example, FIG. 40). As shown in -19 to 40-25, during the latter half execution period of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, the moving image of each reach effect becomes the progress speed V2. The part displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period (for example, FIG. 40-). As shown in FIGS. 19 to 40-25, the speakers 8L and 8R during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect, respectively. The part where BGM, production sound, etc. are output at V4, which is the normal playback speed),
The operation promotion effect can be executed after the start of the second period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-24 and 40-25, the operation promotion effect is executed during the latter half execution period of the fourth reach effect. part),
When the motion promotion effect is executed by the first motion promotion image, the first motion promotion image is displayed while visually displaying the effect movie of the predetermined effect on the display means (for example, in FIGS. 40-33). As shown, when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed, the effect image 079SG005E having a transmittance is also displayed, so that the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E).
When the motion promotion effect is executed by the second motion promotion image, the display means displays the effect movie of the predetermined effect more difficult to see than the first motion promotion image. The second motion-promoting image is displayed in a display area wider than the display area of the first motion-promoting image (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-34, the operation-promoting image 079SG005Bb having a size larger than that of the operation-promoting image 079SG005Ba). When the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb has a transmittance of 0%, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed).
The rate at which the privilege is given when the second motion promotion image is displayed is higher than when the first motion promotion image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 40-17, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb). The rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit when is displayed is lower than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to this feature, the progress speed of the production video of the predetermined production changes between the first period and the second period, but the speed of the production sound corresponding to the predetermined production does not change between the first period and the second period. , It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort, and further, the player can pay attention to which of the first motion promotion image and the second motion promotion image is displayed as the motion promotion effect. You can improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the form A29 is the gaming machine according to the form A28.
While displaying the first motion promoting image, the effect executing means can display the effect moving image of the predetermined effect having a traveling speed of the second speed on the display means (for example, FIGS. 40-24, FIG. As shown in 40-25 and FIGS. 40-33 (C) to 40-33 (E), when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation promotion effect, the battle effect is displayed while the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed. The part where the display of the production video of is executed at the progress speed V2)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to this feature, the production moving image of the predetermined effect is displayed at the second speed while the first motion promotion image is displayed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the form A30 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms A1 to A29.
The effect executing means is
As the predetermined effect, a first predetermined effect (for example, a first reach effect and a third reach effect) and a second predetermined effect (for example, a second reach effect and a fourth reach effect) can be executed, and the first predetermined effect can be executed. After the execution of the first specific section (for example, the first half of the first reach effect and the first half of the third reach effect) in the predetermined effect, the second specific section after the first specific section (for example, the first reach). It is possible to shift to the second half of the production period and the second half of the third reach production).
After the execution of the first specific section of the first predetermined effect, the predetermined effect does not shift to the second specific section, and the first specific pattern (for example, the super reach α1 shown in FIG. 40-18) is notified of the granting of the privilege. (Variable display of super reach β1 shown in FIG. 40-22) and a second specific pattern (for example,) that shifts to the second predetermined effect after executing the first specific section and the second specific section of the first predetermined effect. (Variable display of super reach α3 shown in FIGS. 40-20 and 40-21 and super reach β3 shown in FIGS. 40-24 and 40-25), the first specific section of the first predetermined effect, and the first 2 With a third specific pattern (for example, variable display of super reach α2 shown in FIG. 40-19 and variable display of super reach β2 shown in FIG. 40-23), which ends the predetermined effect after execution with the specific section. Feasible and
In both the transition from the first specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second specific section and the transition from the second specific section of the first predetermined effect to the second predetermined effect, the effect of the effect An effect video having a progress speed of the second speed is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-18 to 40-25, the first half of the first reach effect is executed and the second half of the first reach effect is performed. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first reach effect second half execution period to the second reach effect first half execution period, when shifting from the third reach effect first half execution period to the third reach effect second half execution period , The part where the production video of each reach production is executed at the progress speed V2 when shifting from the third reach production second half execution period to the fourth reach production first half execution period),
Regarding the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect, the speed related to the effect sound is output at the same speed in the first specific section of the first predetermined effect, the second specific section, and the second predetermined effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 40-18 to 40-25, when the transition from the first reach effect first half execution period to the first reach effect second half execution period, the first reach effect second half execution period to the second When shifting to the first half of the reach effect execution period, when shifting from the first half of the reach effect to the second half of the reach effect, the second half of the reach effect to the first half of the reach effect When shifting to, the part that outputs BGM and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R at the playback speed V4 as in other periods)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to this feature, the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect changes when shifting from the first specific section to the second specific section of the first predetermined effect and when shifting from the second specific section to the second predetermined effect. However, the output speed of the effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect does not change when shifting from the first specific section to the second specific section of the first predetermined effect, or when shifting from the second specific section to the second predetermined effect. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort, and further, by changing the progress speed of the effect moving image of the predetermined effect to the second speed, the player can easily recognize the branch of the predetermined effect.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 33). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 33), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 31), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 33).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 33).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum opening period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probability variation state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. 33. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). Including the decision etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 35. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 35 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 35 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 34 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 37 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 37 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 37 (B) shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 38 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 38 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 079SG)
Next, the feature portion 079SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature portion 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 40-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG. As shown in FIG. 40-1, the voice control board 13 in the feature unit 079SG is used for voice synthesis to generate sounds (effect sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R in cooperation with the effect control CPU 120. The IC079SG132, the amplification circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 for amplifying the output sound of the sound generated by the voice synthesis CI079SG132, and the voice data ROM 079SG133 are mounted, and the effect control CPU 120 is from the main board 11. The sound number data is output to the voice synthesis IC079SG132 based on the effect control command, and the sound corresponding to the sound number data is generated in the voice synthesis IC079SG132.

When sound number data is input from the effect control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG 132 individually generates sounds and sound effects corresponding to the input sound number data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R, and causes the amplifier circuit 079SG134. Output. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, and outputs them to the speakers 8L and 8R.

The audio data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each of the speakers 8L and 8R for outputting a sound corresponding to the effect performed by the effect command corresponding to the sound number data in association with the sound number data. .. That is, these control data are output modes (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sound effects such as sound effects and BGM (musical pieces) output from each speaker 8L, 8R during the effect period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period). Is a collection of data including audio data and the like described in chronological order.

FIG. 40-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an image display device 5 in the feature unit 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in the feature unit 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape having a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying an effect such as a variable display of a decorative pattern, a reach effect, an operation promotion effect described later, and a still image display effect. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 has a first reserved storage display area 079SG005D in which the first special figure reserved storage number can be displayed by the number of white circular hold displays, and a white second special figure reserved storage number. A second display area 079SG005Sa including a second hold storage display area 079SG005U that can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and a telop display area 079SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state is configured.

That is, the portion of the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb is the first display area 079SG005F.

The second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb display information related to the game (hold display, telop display, fourth symbol) at the peripheral portion of the display area of the image display device 5 rather than the first display area 079SG005F. This is the display area for displaying (displaying the number of stored memories). That is, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in the feature unit 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Then, the upper right end portion of the image display device 5 includes a fourth symbol 079SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol reserved storage number, and a display of the second special symbol reserved storage number. 3 Display area 079SG005Sb is configured.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and its height is formed to be less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The left-right width is formed to have the same length as the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. Further, the third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and left-right width are formed to be extremely shorter than the height H and the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. There is.

Therefore, in the feature unit 079SG, the area of the first display area 079SG005F in the entire display area of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. ..

As shown in FIG. 40-2 (B), in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold display operation process (see FIGS. 38-13) described later. As a result, each hold display can be rotated and displayed at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3) around the vertical axis.

As shown in FIG. 40-2 (C), in the telop display area 079SG005T, the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop operation process (see FIG. 40-13) described later to respond to the gaming state and the effect being executed. A message (for example, a message according to the state of the effect such as "XX mode is in progress!" During a specific reach effect) is moved by a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3) from the left to the right. It is possible to display while.

The characters included in the message according to the game state reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T and end the display, and at the same time, are displayed again at the left end of the telop display area 079SG005T and are displayed again from the left to the right. Moved in the direction. Therefore, when the message corresponding to the game state is displayed while being moved in the telop display area 079SG005T, the entire message according to the game state is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, so that the player can see the message. It is easier to recognize the current game state.

In the feature unit 079SG, the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U and the message in the telop display area 079SG005T have different constant speeds. It may be rotatable and movable with.

As shown in FIG. 40-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb blink alternately at a fixed cycle. Indicates that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the variable display result is off, both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are turned off (OFF) at the end timing of the variable display, while the variable display result is a big hit or a miss. In that case, both are lit (turned on) at the end timing of the variable display.

The display of the first special figure reserved storage number and the display of the second special figure reserved storage number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the timing when a new reserved storage occurs and the timing when a new variable display is started. Only the number changes. That is, the display of the first special figure reserved storage number and the display of the second special figure reserved storage number in the third display area 079SG005Sb are the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, and the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U. , Unlike the telop display area 079SG005T, the display mode does not change except for the start timing of the variable display.

Next, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores a plurality of types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a predetermined image on the image display device 5 based on the image data of 1 stored in the CGROM based on the instruction by the effect control CPU 120, and can display a plurality of types of image data. By arranging and displaying an image on the image display device 5, it is possible to display a predetermined effect screen. When the predetermined image is not displayed on the image display device 5, another image data is arranged on the front side of the image data of the predetermined image with a transparency of 0% depending on the situation, so that the image of the predetermined image is displayed. The predetermined image is not displayed on the effect screen by controlling the image based on the data so as not to be displayed on the effect screen and by displaying the image on the image display device 5 that has created the display data in which the image data of the predetermined image is not arranged. It may be controlled as such.

As shown in FIGS. 40-3 (A) to 40-3 (D), for example, when displaying an image on the image display device 5, a plurality of image data including image data 1 to 3 are arranged. An image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on the created display data.

As shown in FIG. 40-3 (A), the image data 1 displays the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the fourth This is data drawn to display the symbol 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data drawn for displaying a small symbol of the image data 1 decorative symbol in the first display area 079SG005F (on the left side of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 40-3 (B), the image data 2 is data drawn for displaying the images of the chance-up effect, the still image display effect, and the operation promotion effect, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F. ..

As shown in FIG. 40-3 (C), the image data 3 is data drawn for displaying the variable display of the decorative pattern and the reach effect in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 40-3 (A) to 40-3 (C), the image data 1, the image data 2, and the image data 3 have display priorities for displaying an image on the image display device 5. Is set. As for the display priority, the image data 1 is set to the highest and the image data 3 is set to the lowest (image display priority in the image display device 5: image data 1> image data 2> image data 3). .. That is, in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 1 is displayed as the uppermost image, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than the image based on the image data 1, and is based on the image data 3. The image is displayed as an image of a lower layer (bottom layer) than the image based on the image data 1 and the image based on the image data 2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 40-3 (D), in the image display device 5, the image based on the image data 2 is displayed with priority over the image based on the image data 3, and the image based on the image data 1 is displayed. The image based on the image data 2 and the image based on the image data 3 are displayed with priority.

As shown in FIG. 40-3 (D), when the image based on the image data 1, the image based on the image data 2, and the image based on the image data 3 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the image data 3 Since the image based on is displayed as the image of the lowest layer, at least a part of the image based on the image data 3 becomes difficult to see or invisible due to the image based on the first data or the image based on the image data 2. There is.

Although details will be described later in this feature unit 079SG, the image based on the image data 1 and the image data 2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a moving image whose progress speed is always constant, while on the image data 3. The based image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a plurality of moving speed moving images or still images based on the data stored in the CGROM in advance.

In particular, in this feature unit 079SG, although details will be described later, it is possible to display a moving image of the reach effect at a normal progress speed V1 and a progress speed V2 (slow motion) slower than the V1 during the reach effect of the super reach. It has become. This is because the data for the production moving image displayed at the progress speed V1 and the data for the production movie displayed at the progress speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the present invention is limited to this. Only the data for the production video to be displayed at the progress speed V1 is stored in advance in the CGROM, and a part of the production video for the reach production is set to the progress speed V2 by performing a predetermined process on the data. May be displayable.

In this way, in the feature unit 079SG, the video progress speed, which is the speed at which the production video changes, is set to V1, so that the progress speed of the reach effect recognized by the player is the first speed, which is the non-slow motion period. By setting the progress speed to V2, which is slower than V1, the slow motion period is set to the second speed at which the progress speed of the reach effect recognized by the player is slow. That is, the slow-motion video, which is a production video in which the progress speed of the production in the feature unit 079SG is slow, is the video progress as compared with the non-slow-motion video whose video progress speed is V1 displayed in front of the slow-motion video. Anything with a slow speed will do.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach effects (see FIGS. 40-18 to 40-25), but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, for example, as a super reach effect, the content of the effect moving image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the content of the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 40-18 to 40-25, but the video progress speed. Does not change from V1 to V2, that is, by executing a super reach effect that does not result in a slow motion period, the slow motion period is achieved in the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 40-18 to 40-25. May be made easier for the player to recognize.

That is, in the case of executing the super reach effect in which the content of the effect movie is the same but the video progress speed does not change to V2, the effect movie is a second speed slower than the first speed in the present invention. Is that the same content of the production video is displayed at a video progress speed V2 slower than the video progress speed V1 in the non-slow motion super reach production, so that the production video has a longer period than the non-slow motion super reach production. The displayed production moving image is applicable.

As described above, the feature unit 079SG configures a slow motion effect in which the reach effect felt by the player is slow by slowing the image advance speed of the effect moving image, and the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the output of the above is illustrated as a form that does not change from the playback speed V3, the present invention is not limited to this, and the speakers 8L, 8R are not limited to this, and the video progress speed of the production moving image is not changed (V1 remains). By conversely increasing the reproduction speed of the sound output from the speaker and the light emission cycle of the game effect lamp 9, a pseudo slow motion that the player feels that the progress speed of the reach effect has slowed down may be configured.

That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG includes a plurality of effect output means including display means capable of displaying the effect moving image, and the progress speed of the effect by at least one of these effect output means. Is different between the slow motion period and the non-slow motion period, so that the player can recognize that the effect being executed is slow motion in the slow motion period.

It should be noted that the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the display of the production moving image of the reach effect is always executed at the progress speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the slow motion is not limited to this. The period may be such that the progress speed of the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect can be changed (for example, the progress speed gradually decreases with the passage of time, or the progress speed increases or decreases within a predetermined range).

FIG. 40-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 079SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 40-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 40-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 40-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 40-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the time saving control is performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is used as the time saving control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command for opening the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data are set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "10") in the big hit state described later, for example. ..

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold storage number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The commands shown in FIG. 40-4 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 40-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 40-5, in the feature unit 079SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. 40-10, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 40-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 079SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 079SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as a "big hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 079SG, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 079SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 079SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 40-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is determined based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. The table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 079SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 079SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and a lot of variable display of the second special figure is executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

FIG. 40-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 079SG sets the jackpot type to any of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit". It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 079SG will be described with reference to FIG. 40-7 (B). In the feature unit 079SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change big hit A", "Probability change big hit B", "Probability change big hit C" which are executed and shift to the high accuracy high base state, and only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state to the low accuracy high base state. A "non-probability change jackpot" to be transferred is set.

The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit A" is a big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B" is a big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot C" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state that is advantageous to the player. Further, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in a first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. It may be called as a "non-probable variable jackpot" and may be referred to as a two-round (2R) non-probable variable jackpot.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state which is advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is the same as the probability variation big hit C. It is an open period (0.1 seconds in this feature unit 079SG). After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probabilistic jackpot A, the probabilistic jackpot B, and the probabilistic jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. .. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature unit 079SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-7 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined to control the jackpot type to the jackpot state with a small number of rounds as "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a big hit state in which a small number of winning balls can be obtained is avoided, and the game interest is reduced. It is designed to prevent this.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 40-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 40-8 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG. In the feature unit 079SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 079SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and the like are provided. It may be provided. Further, in the super reach fluctuation pattern, a plurality of super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as super reach α, super reach β, and so on.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG also includes a fluctuation pattern (PC1-1) of a special hit corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a “small hit”.

As shown in FIG. 40-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 079SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, it is determined using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided for determining the variation pattern type. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value of the above, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 40-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 079SG. In this feature unit 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-9, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) And PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 jackpot). If the variable display result is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. It is determined from the fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 40-9, the number of assigned determination values for PB1-2 to PB1-5 is different between the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 500 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 30 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 determination values are assigned to PB1-3, 315 determination values are assigned to PB1-4, and 515 determination values are assigned to PB1-5. That is, in the present feature unit 079SG, when the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot, PB1-3 and PB1-4, which are fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system, are at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot. Since it is determined to be, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a small hit, a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern) using the special hit variation pattern determination table. To do.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 out-of-reach variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

Further, when the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α2 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach α3), PA2-4 (variation pattern out of super reach β2), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β3).

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Non-reach out-of-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from -4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 deviation) and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 deviation).

That is, when the variable display result is "out of place" in the feature unit 079SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

As shown in FIG. 40-8, the reach effect of the super reach α1 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the fluctuation pattern PB1-2) is variable after the first half of the first reach effect described later is executed. The reach effect in which the display result is a big hit, and the reach effect of the super reach α2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PA2-2) executes the first half part and the second half part of the first reach effect described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is out of order, and the reach effect of the super reach α3 (the reach effect executed by the variable display in the variable pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is the first reach described later. This is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a big hit or a miss by executing the second reach effect described later after executing the first half portion and the second half part of the effect.

As for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, as shown in FIGS. 40-8 and 40-9, the longer the special figure variable display time is, the more variable the display is. The rate at which the result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high. That is, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3, the ratio of the variable display result being a big hit is executed by the first reach effect. The variable display result is set higher than the ratio that becomes a big hit.

In addition, the reach effect of super reach β1 (reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result becomes a big hit after executing the first half of the third reach effect described later. Yes, in the reach effect of super reach β2 (the reach effect executed by the variable display of the variable pattern PA2-4), the variable display result is out of alignment after executing the first half part and the second half part of the third reach effect described later. The reach effect of the super reach β3 (the reach effect executed by the variable display in the variable pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) is the first half part and the second half part of the third reach effect described later. After that, the fourth reach effect, which will be described later, is executed, and the variable display result is a big hit or a miss.

As for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, as shown in FIGS. 40-8 and 40-9, the longer the special figure variable display time is, the more variable the display is. The rate at which the result is a big hit (big hit expectation) is set to be high. That is, for the variable display of these fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5, the ratio of the variable display result being a big hit after being executed up to the fourth reach effect is executed by the third reach effect. The variable display result is set higher than the ratio that becomes a big hit.

In the feature unit 079SG, the embodiment in which the second reach effect is always executed after the first reach effect and the fourth reach effect is always executed after the third reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The second reach effect and the fourth reach effect may be performed by themselves.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, each reach effect can be executed by a combination of the first reach effect and the second reach effect during the variable display, and can be executed by the combination of the third reach effect and the fourth reach effect. Although possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect is a combination other than these combinations (for example, a first reach effect and a fourth reach effect, a second reach effect and a third reach effect). A case may be provided in which the execution is performed by a combination of reach effects and the like).

Further, in the present feature section 069SG, as shown in FIG. 40-9, the fluctuation patterns of the super reach β system (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally super reach α system. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is set higher than the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) of the present invention. A part of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β system (variation pattern PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) is not limited, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α system (variation pattern PA2- 2. The jackpot expectation may be lower than any of PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3).

In the RAM 102 of the feature unit 079SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. 40-10. Is provided. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 40-10 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 079SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 079SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 079SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 079SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 079SG153, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 079SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes the pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and determines the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 079SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to judge whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 079SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure hold storage unit 079SG151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order in which it passes through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and is stored as a random count value according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 33 holds the effect control data as shown in FIG. 40-11 (A) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Area 079 SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 079SG190 shown in FIG. 40-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 079SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 079SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 079SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 079SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 40-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 079SG194. The reception command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the 1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) and the hold memory number notification command (the first) Two commands (1 hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 079SG194A associate these start opening winning designation commands with the hold storage number notification command. , A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure reservation storage and the second special figure reservation storage separately is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the command buffer 079SG194A received at the time of starting winning. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 079SG194A. I will go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The hold memory count notification command will be stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 40-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 40-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 36 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting port switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 079 SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 079 SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079 SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" (step 079SGS102; N). Step 079 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N) or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 079 SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 079 SGS104; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the second special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 079 SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" (step 079SGS105; N). Step 079 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 079SGS103 and step 079SGS106, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 079 SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 079 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 079 SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the process of step 079 SGS110, the transmission setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 079 SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 35 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 079 SGS111, for example, by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the hold storage is stored in the effect control board 12. Make settings for sending the number notification command (step 079 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 35 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and then the process of step 079SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 079 SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079 SGS116), and then the start prize is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 40-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the effect control process processing in the feature unit 079SG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U after executing the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161), and these first Hold display operation processing (step 079SG162) for operating (rotating display) the hold display displayed in the hold storage display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the operation display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T. After executing the telop operation process (step 079SGS163) to be performed and the fourth symbol display process (step 079SG164) to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J, any one of steps S170 to S177 is executed according to the value of the effect control process flag. Executes the processing of.

FIG. 40-14 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 39. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079 SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 079SG194A are set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with each other are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). When the second variation start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variation start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer 079SG194A at the time of starting winning are stored for each buffer number. Shift to the top (step 079 SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command or the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B or the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbol is other than "7". It is determined from a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is determined from "334", "778", etc., which are chance eyes. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which a random number for determining the stop symbol is extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 079 SGS277). When the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 079SGS277; Y). Executes the chance-up effect determination process (step 079 SGS278), and determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect in the latter half of the first reach effect or the second half of the third reach effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40-15, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a rate of 20%, and the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 80%. decide. When the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. That is, in the variable display of the reach of the feature unit 079SG, when the chance-up effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the chan-up effect is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 40-27 and 40-32, the feature unit 079SG is provided with only one effect pattern as the effect mode of the chance-up effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a plurality of effect patterns may be provided as an effect mode of the chance-up effect, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which effect pattern the chance-up effect is executed.

Further, in the present feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-27 and 40-32, there is only one production start timing of the chance-up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up effect is not limited to this. A plurality of production start timings of the production may be provided, and the jackpot expectation may be different depending on which production start timing the chance-up production is started.

Further, after the execution / non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined in step 079 SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3). (Step 079 SGS279). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), the notification effect (big hit notification effect or loss) is performed after the second reach effect is completed. In the period until the notification effect) is started, the still image display effect for determining the effect pattern of the still image display effect that displays the still image displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. The determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 40-16 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern of the still image display effect at a rate of 100% when the variable display result is out of alignment. If the pattern SG-1 is determined and the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the still image display effect is determined to be the pattern SG-1 at a rate of 80%, and the pattern SG-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. To do.

As shown in FIG. 40-16 (B), the still image display effect pattern SG-1 stops the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach effect. It is an effect pattern to be displayed as an image, and the still image display effect pattern SG-2 is after displaying the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 as a still image at the end of the second reach effect. , It is an effect pattern that changes the color of the still image.

In particular, the pattern SG-2 is an effect pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a big hit. Therefore, when the second reach effect is executed, is the still image display effect executed in the pattern SG-2? It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

Further, when it is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α3 in step 079SGS281 (step 079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the super reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) (step 079SGS281; N). Step S079SGS282). When the variable display variation pattern is a variation pattern other than super reach β3 (step 079 SGS281; N), the process proceeds to step 079 SGS283, and when the variable display variation pattern is a super reach β3 variation pattern (step 079 SGS281; Y). ), The operation promotion effect determination process (step 079SGS282) for determining the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach effect is executed, and the process proceeds to step 079SGS283. ..

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 40-17 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern SS of the operation promotion effect at a rate of 80% when the variable display result is out of alignment. It is determined to be -1, and the pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. When the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and to pattern SS-2 at a rate of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 40-17 (B), the operation promotion effect pattern SS-1 is an effect pattern for displaying the image of the push button 31B on the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and is an operation promotion pattern. The effect pattern SS-2 is an effect pattern for displaying the image of the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 in a size larger than that of the pattern SS-1.

That is, as the operation promotion effect in the feature unit 079SG, when the image of the large size push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2). In the case of), the ratio is higher than the case where the image of the push button 31B of a normal size is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1). Since the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (the big hit notification effect is executed) is high, the player is made to pay attention to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In step 079 SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not each effect such as the above-mentioned chance-up effect, still image display effect, and operation promotion effect is executed, and the effect control pattern (process table) according to the effect pattern and the variation pattern designation command. select. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079 SGS284).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 079SGS285). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 079SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 079 SGS286). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 079 SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 079 SGS288).

In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display effect process is executed, and the process timer after the subtraction is timered out. Determine if it has been done. Then, if the process timer after subtraction is not timer-out, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer after subtraction is timer-out, the process data The production device may be controlled according to the contents of the next process data by switching and starting the next process timer.

Next, the effect mode of the variable display of the super reach α1 to α3 and the super reach β1 to β3 in the feature unit 079SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-18 to 40-35.

First, with respect to the variable display of super reach α1 to α3 shown in FIGS. 40-18, 40-19, 40-26 (A) to 40-26 (G), when the variable display is started, an image is displayed. In the first display area 079SG005F of the device 5, an effect moving image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is started at V1 which is a normal traveling speed. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction (the progress speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed in V3, which is the normal progress speed. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the BGM, the effect sound, and the like corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb are started to be alternately lit (blinking) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 is started to blink at a fixed cycle. The lamp. Hereinafter, the blinking and lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in the feature unit 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are all synchronized and blinked and lit. The invention is not limited to this, and the blinking and lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-18, 40-19, 40-26 (A) to 40-26 (C), when the development timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the first reach effect During the execution period, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the first half of the first reach effect execution period is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. To. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α1, when the first half of the reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 40-18 and 40-26 (E) to 40-26 (G). In addition, in the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, after a video in which the attack of the ally character A is successful and the enemy character A collapses is displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of jackpots and controlled to the jackpot game state. It is notified that it will be done. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-26 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

During the jackpot notification effect, the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character A is successful is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed (corresponding to FIG. 40-26 (E)), and the enemy character thereafter. The display of the moving image of the part where the character collapses is executed at the traveling speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 40-26 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion where it is notified that the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of jackpots and controlled to the jackpot game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIGS. 40-26 (G)). Applicable to).

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach α2 or super reach α3, when the first half of the first reach effect execution period ends, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 and 40-26 (D). , The attack of the ally character A is not successful, and the second half of the first reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 40-19 and 40-27 (A) to 40-27 (B), when the second half execution period of the first reach effect is entered, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and the BGM, the effect sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In the latter half execution period of the first reach effect, when the effect movie of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 40-27 (B). .. The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 as in the effect movie of the battle effect.

As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the second half execution period of the first reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. To. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α2, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 and 40-27 (E) to 40-27 (G) when the second half execution period of the first reach effect is completed. In addition, in the first display area 079SG005F, as an out-of-order notification effect, after the attack of the ally character A fails and is defeated by the enemy character A, the decorative symbol stops with a combination of out-of-orders and the variable display result is out of order. Is notified.

During the missed notification effect, the moving image is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed in the part where the attack of the ally character A fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is missed. To.

Further, during the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-27 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are extinguished. ) Is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α3, as shown in FIGS. 40-20, 40-21 and 40-27 (D), the ally in the latter half execution period of the first reach effect. The attack of character A succeeds and defeats the enemy character A. Then, the first half of the second reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 40-20, 40-21 and 40-28 (A) to 40-28 (B), when the first half execution period of the second reach effect is entered, the ally character A and the enemy character B become Battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and the BGM, the effect sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle effect progresses, when the second half of the first half execution period of the second reach effect is approached, as shown in FIGS. 40-20, 40-21 and 40-28 (C), an image is displayed as an effect effect. The display of the concentrated line is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, and the display of the moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character A hits the enemy character B.

During the period in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and from the speakers 8L and 8R, BGM, directing sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is shorter). It will be faster). Further, as shown in FIG. 40-28 (D), the number of concentrated lines as the above-mentioned effect effect is gradually increased and displayed.

That is, in the latter half execution period of the second reach effect, the progress speed of the video of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the number of concentrated lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F increases and the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently. Therefore, by increasing the number of concentrated lines and blinking the game effect lamp 9, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result of the battle effect (whether the jackpot notification effect or the out-of-order notification effect is executed). It is possible.

Then, after the second half of the reach effect execution period is completed, as shown in FIGS. 40-20, 40-21 and 40-28 (E), the still image display effect is displayed at the end of the battle effect. The image (the image immediately before the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B in the feature unit 079SG) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F.

During the execution period of the still image display effect, the progress speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is switched from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the telop from the left to the right The movement in the direction is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing, and the BGM, the effect sound, and the like are output from the speakers 8L and 8R while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is the progress of the video of the battle effect. It returns to the cycle before the speed drops to V2.

When the pattern SG-2 is determined as the effect pattern of the still image display effect, as shown in FIGS. 40-29 (A) to 40-29 (E), the battle effect is performed as the still image display effect. The color of the image displayed at the end of is reversed. Then, after the end of the still image display effect in which the colors are reversed, as a jackpot notification effect, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B, and after the enemy character B collapses, it is controlled to the jackpot game state. Be notified. In particular, when the decorative symbol stops in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is performed. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-29 (F), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

As a jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 40-20, a moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is performed at the progress speed V1. Although it is displayed, the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, the moving image in which the decorative symbol stops in the combination of big hits after the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V1. In particular, when the decorative symbol stops in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden and the first display is performed. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not reversed as the still image display effect, and FIG. 40-30 (A). )-As shown in FIGS. 40-30 (D), when the jackpot notification effect is executed as described above, and as shown in FIGS. 40-30 (F) to 40-30 (H), the miss notification is announced. The production may be executed.

The jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-1 is the same as the jackpot notification effect when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, as shown in FIG. 40-20. In addition, the moving image in which the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1, but the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, after the enemy character B collapses, it is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-30 (E), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

Further, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-1, the attack of the ally character A does not hit the enemy character B, and the attack of the enemy character B is conversely the attack of the ally character A. After a hit and the ally character A collapses, the decorative symbol stops in a combination of being off, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled.

As an out-of-order notification effect, as shown in FIG. 40-21, a moving image until the attack of the ally character A is not hit and is defeated by the enemy character B is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-30 (I), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are extinguished. ) Is performed.

Next, regarding the variable display of super reach β1 to β3 shown in FIGS. 40-22, 40-23, 40-31 (A) to 40-31 (H), when the variable display is started, the image In the first display area 079SG005F of the display device 5, an effect moving image such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is started at V1 which is a normal traveling speed. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction (the progress speed of the moving image in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed in V3, which is the normal progress speed. At the same time, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the BGM, the effect sound, and the like corresponding to the variable display are started at the normal reproduction speed of V4.

Further, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, in the fourth symbol 079SG005J, the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005jb are started to be alternately lit (blinking) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 is started to blink at a fixed cycle. The lamp.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-22, 40-23, and 40-31 (A) to 40-31 (C), when the development timing of the reach effect is reached due to the progress of the variable display, the first half of the third reach effect is reached. During the execution period, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the first half execution period of the third reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. To. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β1, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 40-22 and 40-31 (E) to 40-31 (G). In the first display area 079SG005F, as a jackpot notification effect, it is notified that after a moving image in which the attack of the ally character B is successful and the enemy character A collapses is displayed, the control to the jackpot gaming state is performed. In particular, when the jackpot notification effect is started, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-31 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

During the jackpot notification effect, the moving image of the part where the attack of the ally character B is successful is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed (corresponding to FIG. 40-30 (E)), and the enemy character thereafter. The display of the moving image of the part where the character collapses is executed at the traveling speed V2, which is slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 40-30 (F)). Then, the moving image of the portion notified that the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of jackpots and controlled to the jackpot game state is executed again at the normal progress speed V1 (FIG. 40-30 (G)). Applicable to).

During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach β2 or super reach β3, when the first half execution period of the third reach effect ends, as shown in FIGS. 40-23 and 40-31 (D). , The attack of the ally character B is not successful, and the second half of the third reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 40-23 and 40-32 (A) to 40-32 (B), when the second half execution period of the third reach effect is entered, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A continues. proceed.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and the BGM, the effect sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In the latter half execution period of the third reach effect, when the effect movie of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 40-32 (B). .. The chance-up effect is executed at the progress speed V1 as in the effect movie of the battle effect.

In particular, in the image display device 5, the small design is displayed with priority over the production video of the chance-up effect, while the production video of the chance-up effect is the image shown in the decorative design (FIGS. 40-32 (B)). It is displayed with priority over "7") displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display device 5. Therefore, in this feature unit 079SG, during the execution period of the chance-up effect, the player can recognize that the variable display is being performed by visually recognizing the small symbol, and display the effect video of the chance-up effect. By displaying the symbol with priority over the symbol, it is possible to surely secure an area for displaying the effect moving image of the chan-up effect in the image display device 5.

In the feature unit 079SG, the production video of the chance-up effect is displayed with priority over the decorative design, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative design is displayed from the production video of the chance-up effect. May be displayed with priority. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which combination of decorative symbols the reach effect during execution has evolved from, so that the game interest can be improved.

As the battle effect progresses, when the latter half of the second half execution period of the first reach effect is approached, the display of a moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. To. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character A.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 40-23 and 40-32 (E) to 40-32 (G) when the second half execution period of the third reach effect is completed. In the first display area 079SG005F, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order after the attack of the ally character B fails and the enemy character A is defeated as an out-of-order notification effect.

During the missed notification effect, the moving image is displayed at V1 which is the normal progress speed in the part where the attack of the ally character B fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is missed. To.

Further, during the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-32 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are extinguished. ) Is performed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β3, as shown in FIGS. 40-24, 40-25 and 40-32 (D), the ally in the latter half execution period of the third reach effect. The attack of character B succeeds and defeats enemy character A. Then, the first half of the fourth reach effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 40-24, 40-25 and 40-33 (A) to 40-33 (B), when the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect is entered, the ally character AB and the enemy character B The battle production progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the production moving image of the battle effect is executed at the normal progress speed V1. Further, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and the BGM, the effect sound, etc. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle effect progresses, the latter half of the first half execution period of the fourth reach effect is approached, and as shown in FIGS. 40-24, 40-25 and 40-33 (C), the image display device 5 In the first display area 079SG005F, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B is started. When the display of the moving image is started, the traveling speed of the moving image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the moving image is switched from V1 to V2 which is slower than the V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, it is displayed in slow motion that the ally character B hits the enemy character B.

During the period in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B in slow motion in this way (during the period in which the progress speed of the video of the battle effect is V2 in the first display area 079SG005F). Is executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3 without changing the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and BGM, production sound, etc. from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the playback speed V4. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened (the blinking cycle is shorter). It will be faster).

That is, in the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 blinks violently as the progress speed of the video of the battle effect decreases to V2, so that the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 causes the battle effect. It is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the effect result (whether the jackpot notification effect or the out-of-order notification effect is executed).

Then, as the latter half of the fourth reach effect progresses, the operation promotion effect is executed. When the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be the pattern SS-1, the push button 31B together with the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates the shape of the push button 31B in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. The display of the meter 079SG005M and the effect image 079SG005E suggesting the operation acceptance period of the meter 079SG005M is started, and the update display of the meter 079SG005M and the enlarged update display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the peripheral edge of the image display device 5 are started. As described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 40-3), they are constant regardless of the progress speed of the battle effects. It is displayed as a moving speed video.

As shown in FIG. 40-33 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the update display of the meter 079SG005M, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged. The update display progresses. Since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transmittance (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can visually recognize the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and when the operation promotion effect is not executed. The visibility of the battle effect is lower than that. Since the execution period of the operation promotion effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 40-33 (D) and 40-33 (E), the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, but the end timing (push) of the operation promotion effect. At the time of the end timing of the operation reception of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed until it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B, that is, the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is not started. It has become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 40-34 (A) to 40-34 (E), when the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be the pattern SS-2, the first display of the image display device 5 In the center of the area 079SG005F, as an operation promotion image imitating the shape of the push button 31B, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, and the meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B are displayed. Then, the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. As described above, since the images of these operation promotion effects are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 40-3), they are constant regardless of the progress speed of the battle effects. It is displayed as a moving speed video.

As shown in FIG. 40-34 (D), during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B can be notified to the player by the update display of the meter 079SG005M, while the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb makes it possible to notify the player. Most of the images of the battle production are hidden. As described above, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is an image having a size larger than that of the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and having a transmittance of 0%. Therefore, when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than that in the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation promotion effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 even during the execution of the operation promotion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 40-34 (D) and 40-34 (E), the battle effect continues at the progress speed V2 during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, but the end timing (push) of the operation promotion effect. At the time of the end timing of the operation reception of the button 31B), the scene does not proceed until it is known whether or not the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B, that is, the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is not started. It has become.

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation promotion effect, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is set). When it ends), the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is executed from the timing when the players operate the push button 31B or the timing when the operation promotion effect ends.

As a big hit notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 40-24 and 40-35 (A) to 40-35 (C), a moving image in which the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B is Although it is displayed at the progress speed V1, the moving image in which the enemy character B collapses is displayed at the progress speed V2. Then, the moving image after the enemy character B has fallen is displayed at the progress speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the hold display and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-35 (D), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. Further, the display of the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination showing the jackpot of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the lighting display of the fourth symbol (the lighting display of both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb). ) Is performed.

Further, as the disengagement notification effect after the operation promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 40-25 and 40-35 (E) to 40-35 (G), the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B. On the contrary, after the attack of the enemy character B hits the ally character B and the ally character B collapses, it is notified that the jackpot game state is not controlled. In particular, when the disengagement notification effect is executed, the first hold storage display area 079SG005D, the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area are hidden. An image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed with 079SG005Sa.

As the missed notification effect, as shown in FIGS. 40-25, a moving image until the attack of the ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbol stops due to the combination of missed is displayed at the traveling speed V1. During the disengagement notification effect, the rotation of the hold display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from the left direction to the right direction are executed while maintaining the traveling speed V3, and from the speakers 8L and 8R. Is output while maintaining the reproduction speed V4 without changing the BGM, the effect sound, and the like. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIGS. 40-35 (H), when the variable display is completed, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the detachment, and the display on the image display device 5 is the normal background image before the reach effect. Switch to the display. After the end of the variable display, during the symbol confirmation period, the stop display with a combination indicating the detachment of the decorative symbol and the small symbol and the extinguishing display of the fourth symbol (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb) are extinguished. ) Is performed.

40-26 (H), 40-27 (H), 40-29 (F), 40-30 (E), 40-30 (I), 40-31 (H), As shown in FIGS. 40-32 (H), 40-35 (D), and 40-35 (H), in the feature unit 079SG, the telop (message) is displayed in the image display device 5 at the end timing of the variable display. Although the form in which the telop display area 079SG005T including the telop display area 079SG005T is displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at the end timing of the variable display, the display itself of the telop display area 079SG005T on the image display device 5 is illustrated. On the other hand, the display of the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T itself may not be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, in the variable display of the super reach α3 and the super reach β3, the game effect lamp 9 is used only during the slow motion period immediately before the notification effect (the period during which the display of the effect movie of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened in a slow motion period other than immediately before the notification effect. Further, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened even in a part of the period (non-slow motion period) in which the display of the effect moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. During the first half execution period, the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V1, and the latter half of each of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. During the partial execution period, the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2. Therefore, while the moving image of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progress speed V2, the degree of emotional transfer of the player to the ally character displayed during the reach effect is increased, and the jackpot notification is given. Since it is possible to raise the expectation that the production will be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. On the other hand, during the first half execution period and the second half execution period of each of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production, BGM and production sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R are produced. Since the output remains unchanged at V4, which is the normal playback speed, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

Further, since the sound output hand in the feature unit 079SG includes the voice synthesis IC 079SG132, the amplifier circuit 079SG134, and the speakers 8L and 8R, the reproducibility is achieved during variable display including execution of reach effect and execution of jackpot game. It is possible to output high-quality BGM (music), sound effects, and other directing sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume, which makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-20, 40-21, 40-24, and 40-25, the game effect is exhibited during the second half execution period of the second reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Since the lamp 9 blinks at a shorter cycle than usual, the effect can be improved by blinking the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter cycle during the period when the progress speed of the effect moving image is V2.

In the feature unit 079SG, a mode in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the second half execution period of the reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. The blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second reach effect and the fourth reach effect. By doing so, the player can recognize that the notification effect will be executed soon by the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the second half execution period of the reach effect and the second half execution period of the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is limited to this. The blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing from the first reach effect to the fourth reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-19 to 40-25, the progress of the effect video of the reach effect during each execution period of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach effect. While the speed changes between V1 and V2, the rotation speed of the hold display and the moving speed of the telop are both constant at V3, and the reproduction speed of the production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which both the rotation speed of the hold display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement display speed of the telop are V3, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The rotation speed of the hold display and the movement display speed of the telop may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-2 (A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. During execution, the player can more easily recognize the reach effect displayed on the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display or telop displayed on the second display area 079SG005Sa, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-18 to 40-25, in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U, the rotation display of the hold display is at the rotation speed V3 during the period other than the reach effect. In the telop display area 079SG005T, the telop movement display is executed at the movement speed V3, that is, the rotation display of the hold display and the telop movement display are executed at the same speed as during the reach production, so that the player can perform the telop movement display. It is possible to prevent these pending displays and telops from becoming difficult to recognize.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-2 (C), the characters included in the telop (message) in the telop display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the telop display area 079SG005T, and at the same time the display ends, the telop display area is displayed. Since it is displayed again at the left end of the 079SG005T and moved from the left to the right again, the entire telop (message) is always displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T. Therefore, the player can always recognize the entire movement display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the entire telop is always moved and displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this and moves in the telop display area 079SG005T. Some of the displayed telops may be invisible to the player at some time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-20, 40-21, and 40-28, during the second half execution period of the reach effect, the effect movie of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the image is displayed. By executing the effect effect of displaying the concentrated line on the display device 5, the effect effect of the latter half of the second reach effect can be enhanced by the effect effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. In particular, in this feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 (C) and 40-28 (D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle effect progresses, so that the concentrated lines are displayed. It is possible for the player to more easily recognize that the second reach effect is completed and the jackpot notification effect or the miss notification effect is executed due to the increase in the number.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which the effect effect in the present invention is displayed as a concentrated line, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the movable body 32 within a predetermined range, the speaker 8L, and the like. The output of the specific effect sound from the 8R, the vibration of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc. are executed as the effect effect, and the second reach effect ( As the battle effect progresses, the effect level of the effect effect is gradually increased (for example, the operating range of the movable body 32 is widened, the volume of the specific effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased, and the stick. The vibration of the controller 31A and the push button 31B may be increased, the vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or the image display device 5 itself may be increased, and the like).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-26 (G), 40-29 (E), 40-30 (D), 40-31 (G), and 40-35 (C), as a jackpot notification effect. When the decorative symbol is stopped by the combination of big hits, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are hidden and the first display area 079SG005F is displayed. Since the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the player is made to recognize that the jackpot gaming state is controlled while further improving the visibility of the jackpot notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa. It can be done easily.

When executing the jackpot notification effect, the feature unit 079SG hides the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. The first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa exemplify a mode in which the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second display area 079SG005Sa is used. In a state where the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are displayed, the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (No. 2 In the display area 079SG005Sa, the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed overlapping with the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T).

At this time, the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D, the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are transparently displayed or reduced, or the first reserved storage display area 079SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 079SG005U are displayed. The visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by hiding only one of the hold display displayed in the hold display area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-28 and 40-29, during the second half execution period of the reach effect, the still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while FIGS. 40-20 and FIGS. As shown in 40-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotation display of the hold display in the first hold storage display area 079SG005D and the second hold storage display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and FIG. 40-2. Since the telop movement display in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in (C) continues without stopping, the hold display is being displayed and the telop movement display is being displayed during the execution period of the still image display effect. Can be easily recognized by the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the display of the hold display and the display of the telop by stopping the rotation display of the hold display and the movement display of the telop. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-16 and 40-29 (A) to 40-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SG-2, the colors of the still image are reversed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is executed by reversing the color of the still image.

In the feature unit 079SG, as a still image display effect, as a form of changing the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, a form of reversing the color of the still image is illustrated. The form of changing the color of the still image is not limited to that of changing the color of the still image to black and white, changing only a part of the color of the still image, and adding a new color to the still image. It may be added.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-29 (B), when the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed by executing the still image display effect in the pattern SG-2, Since the colors of the hold display and telop displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the color of the fourth symbol displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not inverted, the player is displayed in these second display areas 079SG005Sa. By comparing the hold display, telop, fourth symbol, etc. with the still image, it is possible to easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature unit 079SG, a pattern that shifts to the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect after the execution of the first reach effect or the third reach effect, and the first reach effect or the third reach effect. Since there is a pattern in which the variable display that shifts to the second reach production and the fourth reach production ends after the production is executed, the display of the production video of the reach production progresses during the first reach production and the third reach production. Whether or not to shift to the second reach effect or the fourth reach effect after being executed at the speed V2, and the display of the effect video of the reach effect during the second reach effect or the third reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified that the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after the game is played, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-19, 40-20, 40-21, 40-23, 40-24, and 40-25, the first reach effect and the third reach effect are performed during the first reach effect. During the 1st reach production second half execution period and the 3rd reach production second half execution period, the production in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character and the 1st reach production second half execution period or the 3rd reach production second half execution period proceed at the same time. Since it is executed at speed V1, the progress speed when shifting from the first reach effect first half execution period to the first reach effect second half execution period or from the third reach effect first half execution period to the third reach effect second half execution period. However, in the second half execution period of the first reach production and the second half execution period of the third reach production, the expectation that the ally character is controlled to the jackpot game state by being different from the progress speed of the production in which the enemy character is defeated is excessively raised. It can be prevented from being lost. Further, FIGS. 40-18, 40-20, 40-22, 40-24, 40-25 and 40-26 (E) to 40-26 (G), 40-29 (C). 40-29 (E), 40-30 (B) to 40-30 (D), 40-31 (E) to 40-31 (G), 40-35 (A) to As shown in 40-35 (C), in the jackpot notification effect of this feature unit 079SG, while the video is displayed at the progress speed V2 when the enemy character collapses due to the hit of the attack of the ally character, while it is executed. 40-19, 40-21, 40-23, 40-25 and 40-27 (E) to 40-27 (G), 40-30 (F) to 40-30 (H). ), FIGS. 40-32 (E) to 40-32 (G), and 40-35 (D) to 40-35 (F). Since the display of is executed at the progress speed V1, when the disengagement notification effect is executed, the display of the effect video of the disengagement notification effect is not executed at the progress speed V2, so that the player is dissatisfied. Can be prevented from increasing excessively, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, in this feature unit 079SG, when the variable display result of the super reach is executed as a missed notification effect, a mode in which the display of the effect moving image of the missed notification effect is executed at the progress speed V1 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and in a part of the variable display of the super reach, the display of the effect moving image of the out-of-order notification effect may be executed at a progress speed V2 slower than V1. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the production of the out-of-court notification effect, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

In the feature unit 079SG, the mode in which the traveling speed V1 of the production moving image during the jackpot notification effect is the third speed in the present invention and the traveling speed V2 of the effecting moving image during the jackpot notification effect is the fourth speed in the present invention is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V1. Further, the fourth speed in the present invention may be a speed different from the traveling speed V2 as long as it is slower than the third speed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-24 and 40-25, the operation promotion effect is executed when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the latter half execution period of the fourth reach effect. Therefore, the effect of the fourth reach effect can be enhanced by the operation promotion effect.

It should be noted that the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the display of the effect moving image of the fourth reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2 during the execution of the operation promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. During the execution of the operation promotion effect, the display of the effect moving image of the fourth reach effect may be executed at the progress speed V1. Further, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the operation promotion effect is executed before the operation promotion effect is executed, and during the execution period of the suggestion effect, the effect video of the fourth reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. It may be executed.

Further, as the operation promotion effect of the feature unit 079SG, in addition to the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, the meter 079SG005M for notifying the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F. While the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba or the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are being displayed, the display of the effect video of the fourth reach effect at the progress speed V2 is continuously executed, but the notification effect is not progressed. .. Further, when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, and when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. Then, the same jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect is executed. Therefore, since the notification effect is not executed at the timing before the end of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B (until the operation promotion effect ends), the push button is not operated by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing whether or not the push button 31B is controlled to the jackpot game state during the operation acceptance period.

The feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which the detection means in the present invention is a push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the detection means is other than the push button 31B such as the stick controller 31A. In addition to the operation means of the above, sensors such as a motion sensor and a touch sensor that can detect the movement of the player may be used.

Further, FIGS. 40-18, 40-20, 40-22, 40-24, 40-26 (E) to 40-26 (G), 40-29 (C) to 40-29. (E), FIGS. 40-30 (B) to 40-30 (D), 40-31 (E) to 40-31 (G), 40-35 (A) to 40-35 (C). ), In the jackpot notification effect in this feature unit 079SG, the video of the part where the attack of the ally character hits the enemy character is displayed at the progress speed V1, while the video of the part where the enemy character collapses progresses. It is displayed at speed V2. On the other hand, FIGS. 40-19, 40-21, 40-23, 40-25 and 40-27 (E) to 40-27 (G), 40-30 (E) to 40-. As shown in 30 (G), FIGS. 40-32 (E) to 40-32 (G), and 40-35 (D) to 40-35 (F), the disengagement notification effect of the feature unit 079SG is produced. The moving image is displayed at the progress speed V1 and is not displayed at the progress speed V2. That is, when the jackpot notification effect is executed, the player can be impressed that the jackpot gaming state is controlled by displaying a part of the effect movie of the jackpot notification effect at the progress speed V2. it can.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result is a big hit in the present invention, the still image display effect can be executed by the pattern SG-2 (still image display effect in which the colors are inverted). Therefore, as a still image display effect, the player can pay attention to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is reversed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 079SG, a mode in which the still image display effect of the pattern SG-2 is a special effect in the present invention is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special effect in the present invention is not limited to this. , An effect other than the still image display effect of the pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, an effect in which the effect color is gold or rainbow, etc.) may be executed.

Further, in the operation promotion effect of the feature unit 079SG, the pattern SS-1 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba imitating the push button 31B is imitated in the first display area 079SG005F and the push button 31B imitating the push button 31B in the first display area 079SG005F. It can be executed by any effect pattern of the pattern SS-2 in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, which is larger in size than the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, is displayed as the operation promotion image. When the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, while the battle effect of the fourth reach effect can be visually recognized in the pattern SS-2. When the operation promotion effect is executed, most of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is hidden by the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba, so that the operation promotion effect is the first as compared with the case where the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. The visibility of the battle production of 4 reach production is low. Further, as shown in FIG. 40-17, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 is when the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Since the variable display result is lower than the jackpot ratio, the player can pay attention to whether the operation promotion effect is executed in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the game interest can be improved. Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-24, 40-25 and 40-33 (C) to 40-33 (E), when the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed as the operation promotion effect, the operation promotion image is displayed. While the 079SG005Ba is being displayed, the display of the production video of the battle effect is executed at the progress speed V2, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 079SG, when the operation promotion effect is executed by the pattern SS-2, the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb causes the traveling speed V2 (slow motion). ) Has illustrated a form in which the visibility of the production video (battle production) of the fourth reach effect is reduced, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is the pattern SS. When executed in -2, in addition to the display of the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb, a dedicated background image is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, so that the production video (battle) of the fourth reach effect is displayed. The production) may be completely invisible. In addition, during the period when the production video (battle production) of the 4th reach production is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation promotion production pattern SS-2, the production video of the 4th reach production is displayed. The display may be executed at the traveling speed V1 (non-slow motion).

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as the reach effect of the super reach, the second reach effect can be executed after the first reach effect, and the fourth reach effect can be executed after the third reach effect. Further, as the variable display of the super reach, the variable display of the super reach α1 that notifies the big hit after the first half execution period of the first reach effect and the variable display of the super reach β1 that notifies the big hit after the first half execution period of the third reach effect. Display, variable display of super reach α2 that executes the first half of the first reach effect and then the second half of the first reach effect to notify the deviation, and the second half of the third reach after the first half of the third reach effect. Variable display of super reach β2 that executes the partial execution period and notifies the deviation, variable display of super reach α3 that shifts to the second reach effect after the first reach effect exchange, third reach effect exchange partial execution period It is possible to execute the variable display of the super reach α3 that shifts to the fourth reach effect after, and as shown in FIGS. 40-18 to 40-25, the first half of the first reach effect and the second half of the first reach effect. When shifting to the execution period, when shifting from the first reach effect second half execution period to the second reach effect first half execution period, when shifting from the third reach effect first half execution period to the third reach effect second half execution period , When shifting from the third reach production second half execution period to the fourth reach production first half execution period, the production video of each reach production is executed at the progress speed V2, and the first reach production first half execution period is started. When shifting to the second half of the reach effect execution period, when shifting from the second half of the reach effect to the first half of the reach effect, the first half of the third reach effect to the second half of the reach effect When shifting from the third reach production second half execution period to the fourth reach production first half execution period, BGM and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods. Therefore, when shifting from the first reach effect first half execution period to the first reach effect second half execution period, when shifting from the first reach effect second half execution period to the second reach effect first half execution period, the third reach When shifting from the first half of the production period to the second half of the third reach production, and when shifting from the second half of the third reach production to the first half of the fourth reach production, the player feels uncomfortable. It can be prevented from being stored. Further, by displaying the effect video of each reach effect at the progress speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branch of the reach effect drawn by the player.

The variable display of the super reach of the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a mode in which two reach effects can be executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the super reach is 3 or more. The reach effect may be executable, or only one reach effect may be executable.

Although the feature portion 079SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature unit 079SG, a first reach effect, a second reach effect, a third reach effect, and a fourth reach effect are provided as the reach effect of the super reach, and a part of the effect movie of the reach effect is provided in all of these reach effects. Although the embodiment in which the display of the above is executed at the progress speed V2 (slow motion) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the production moving image is not executed at the progress speed V2 in each reach effect ( A pattern in which the display of the production moving image is always executed at the progress speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the production movie is displayed at the progress speed V2 may be provided. Further, the effect contents may be different between the reach effect in which a part of the effect moving image is displayed at the progress speed V2 and the reach effect in which the display of the effect moving image is not executed at the progress speed V2. By doing so, it is possible to create variations in the reach production of the super reach, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, the production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R always has a constant playback speed (reproduction speed V4) regardless of whether or not the display of the production video is executed at the progress speed V2. Although the output form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as the modified example 079SG-1, the first reach effect, the second reach effect, the third reach effect, and the fourth reach are shown. In the first half of each reach production second half execution period of the production, the playback speed V4 from the speakers 8L, 8R as in the first half execution period of each reach production of 1 reach production, 2nd reach production, 3rd reach production, and 4th reach production. While the production sound is output at, what is V4 in the latter half of each reach production (slow motion period) of the first reach production, the second reach production, the third reach production, and the fourth reach production? The production sound may be output at a different reproduction speed (for example, V5 slower than the reproduction speed V4). By doing so, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect sound on the reach effect by making the reproduction speed of the effect sound different while the display of the effect video of the reach effect is being executed at the progress speed V2. You can improve your interest.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-33 and 40-34, the first display area 079SG005F is visually recognized during the execution period of the reach effect by displaying the effect image 079SG005E and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb. The present invention exemplifies a form in which the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb cannot be reduced while the property can be reduced, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As a modification 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Further, in the case where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this way, as shown in FIGS. 40-36 and 40-37, after the end of the reach effect. , The visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as a part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 40-36 (A) to 40-36 (D), when the second reach effect is executed, when the second reach effect is completed together with the still image display effect, A circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb as a part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect. To go. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), it is shown in FIGS. 40-36 (E) and 40-36 (F). As described above, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot notification effect, or that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 40-37 (A) to 40-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is executed, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player pushes. When the operation promotion effect is completed without operating the button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area and the effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed second as part of the jackpot notification effect or the loss notification effect. Enlarged display is performed toward the area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), it is shown in FIGS. 40-37 (E) and 40-37 (F). As described above, it is sufficient to notify that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as the jackpot notification effect, or that the jackpot gaming state is not controlled as the loss notification effect.

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in FIGS. 40-36 and 40-37 is an image based on the image data 2 shown in FIG. 40-3 (B), and the drawing range is expanded as an image based on the image data 2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F and not to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

As described above, in the present modification 079SG-2, while the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, as shown in FIGS. 40-36 and 40-37, the second display area is second. After the end of the reach effect or after the end of the fourth reach effect, the effect image 079SG005Ea reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Does not change, so that the player can easily recognize the timing when the notification effect is set by changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, and the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be improved. Since it does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the hold display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth symbol, and the like.

Further, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. 40-3 (B), and is the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sa. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is changed by drawing so as to enlarge the display toward the display area 079SG005Sb, the first display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are not changed. Only the visibility of the display area 079SG005F can be accurately reduced, and the drawing of the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data can be drawn from the center of the first display area 079SG005F to the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display. Since the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by executing toward the area 079SG005Sb, it is possible to make it difficult to change the visibility of the area corresponding to the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Further, in the present modification 079SG-2, a mode in which the operation promotion effect is executed during the fourth reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is one of the notification effects. It may be executed as a part.

When the operation promotion effect is executed as a part of the notification effect, it is the same as the modified example 079SG-2 as shown in FIGS. 40-38 (A) to 40-38 (F) as the modified example 079SG-3. In addition, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in FIG. 40-38 (D), the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M are displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion effect. To do.

By displaying the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 40-2 (A), it is possible to avoid deterioration of visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

After that, the player operates the push button 31B, or the player is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the end of the operation promotion effect without operating the push button 31B, or the jackpot game state. Is notified that it is not controlled.

As described above, in the present modification 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is lowered by the enlarged display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as the image of the first image data. Since the visibility of the push button 31B does not decrease, the operation promotion effect can be made to stand out with respect to the fourth reach effect, so that the player can be effectively encouraged to operate the push button 31B.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the variable display result is always a big hit. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot type of the jackpot is always specified. The probability variation jackpot (furthermore, the probability variation jackpot A that is most advantageous to the player) may be set. Furthermore, as an effect pattern when the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach effect, the jackpot game state is controlled again after the disconnection notification effect is once executed. It may be possible to execute a revival effect that notifies. In the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 in this way, the big hit type is a probable big hit and a non-probable big hit (non-probable big hit). A case where the game is controlled to the jackpot game state and a case where the probability variation jackpot is controlled to the jackpot game state) may be provided. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, so that the game interest can be improved. ..

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, a form of displaying a message indicating a game state is exemplified as a telop displayed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T is not limited to this. As the displayed telop, even if it is possible to display a message suggesting whether or not the variable display being executed or the variable display that has not been started is controlled to the jackpot game state, the title of the reach effect being executed, and the like can be displayed. Good.

Further, the feature unit 079SG exemplifies a form in which a telop can be displayed according to the state of the effect being executed in the telop display area 079SG005T, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the telop display area 079SG005T is not limited thereto. The telops displayed in are those that can identify the game state, the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit in the variable display during execution (big hit expectation), the explanation of the effect during execution (especially the reach effect), and the reach effect It may be a notice effect or the like that can be executed from a timing earlier than that.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-33 and 40-34, the operation promotion effect (operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and operation promotion) is performed during the period when the moving image of the reach effect is displayed at the progress speed V2. Although the mode of executing the image 079SG005Bb) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion effect is executed after the moving image of the reach effect returns from the progress speed V2 to the progress speed V1. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-33 and 40-34, as an operation promotion effect, a mode in which the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the operation promotion effect, not only the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed, but also the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed, for example. As an effect before displaying, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are duplicated and displayed to promote the operation. You may execute the effect that 079SG005Ba and the operation promotion image 079SG005Bb are displayed.

When the effect of moving the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B toward the center of the image display device 5 is executed as a precursor effect of the operation promotion effect, for example, the images of the plurality of push buttons 31B are displayed. The moving display speed of the image display device 5 may decrease as it approaches the central portion of the image display device 5. By doing so, the player can accurately recognize that the operation promotion effect is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-20, 40-21, 40-24, and 40-25, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although the embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progress speed V2, the number of colors (emission colors) of the game effect lamp 9 is different from that when the reach effect video display is executed at the progress speed V1. You may. For example, when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1, the game effect lamp 9 can emit light in a plurality of colors, while the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 may be capable of emitting light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing so, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the emission color of the game effect lamp 9.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-20, 40-21, 40-24, and 40-25, when the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, Although the embodiment in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. When the display of the moving image of the reach effect is executed at the progress speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the display of the video of the reach effect and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as shown in FIGS. 40-26, 40-29, 40-30, 40-31, and 40-35, as an effect mode of the jackpot notification effect, the reach effect is completed. Later, a form in which the decorative symbol is displayed while swinging with a combination indicating a jackpot is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol is displayed while swinging with a combination indicating a jackpot. The timing may be during the reach production.

Further, the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player can select at least a part of production sounds such as BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R during a game by operating an operating means that can be operated by the player. May be applied to. By doing so, when the player sets the output of the effect sound that suits his / her own taste, the speaker 8L is displayed when the display of the moving image of each reach effect is executed at the progress speed V1. , Since the effect sound output from 8R is reproduced at the reproduction speed V4 without changing, the effect sound is reproduced from the reproduction speed V4 even though the player himself selects the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. However, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest due to the low-speed playback.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, as the end suggestion effect in the present invention, it is possible to execute an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character in the first reach effect second half execution period and the third reach effect second half execution period. Although the variable display result is always out of alignment when is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first reach effect second half execution period and the third reach effect second half execution period. After the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed, the display on the image display device 5 is once switched to the display of the normal background image before the reach effect, and then the effect indicating that the variable display result is a big hit. A case may be provided in which (for example, a resurrection effect) is executed.

When the revival effect is executed in this way, the revival effect is performed for the player by lighting and blinking the game effect lamp 9 before displaying the moving image of the revival effect on the image display device 5. May be made aware that is executed. Further, as an effect mode of the revival effect, for example, the ally character may attack the enemy character again and defeat the enemy character. In particular, when executing the resurrection effect, a part of the video of the resurrection effect (for example, a video of a scene in which an enemy character collapses) is displayed at a progress speed of V2 so as to enhance the effect of the resurrection effect. May be good.

Further, although a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are disclosed in the present specification, the gaming machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more feature portions and modified examples from these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. You may.

For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 079SG may be a pachinko gaming machine whose jackpot probability can be changed by changing the set values as shown in FIGS. 31 to 39. In such a case, for example, in the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach β1, a pattern is provided in which the variable display result is out of alignment, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous for the player. When is set, even if the variable display result is out of order in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1 at a higher rate than when other set values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Good. By doing so, the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment in the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach β1 can be used as a suggestion that the high setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is out of order while suppressing the deterioration of the player's interest due to the variable display result being out of place in the variable display of super reach α1 and super reach β1. It will be possible.

Further, in the feature unit 079SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that plays a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs the above.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 11 Main board 12 Production control board 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU
200 Dispensing device 202 1st guide passage forming part 201 Ball tank forming part 203 1st passage forming body 210 Terminal board 220 Cover body 271A to 271H Holes 314,324,334 Cover part 340 Ball stop member N1 to 6,11 to 16 Screw member

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that can play games
A storage unit that can store game media and
A payout unit that can pay out game media,
A guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion.
A cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion, and a cover portion.
With
The cover portion is provided with a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion to the guide passage forming portion.
The guide passage forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion to the payout portion.
The predetermined limiting portion is provided so that the game medium that has fallen on the cover portion can be dropped from the cover portion without staying.
further,
Sound output means that can output directing sound and
Display means that can display production videos and
An effect executing means capable of displaying a character's effect moving image on the display means and executing a predetermined effect of outputting the effect sound by the sound output means along with the display of the character's effect moving image.
With
The effect executing means is
In the first period of the predetermined effect, the effect moving speed at which the effect progresses at the first speed can be displayed on the display means.
In the second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, the effect moving speed at which the progress speed of the effect is slower than the first speed can be displayed on the display means.
The effect sound corresponding to the predetermined effect is characterized in that the speed related to the effect sound can be output by the sound output means at the same speed in both the first period and the second period. Machine.

Images